Home

T-Mobile SM-N900T Samsung Galaxy Note 3 User Manual

1. gt Sound amp shot Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding background sounds for a few seconds The background sound is recorded for up to 9 seconds after taking the photo Drama Use this to take a series of photos of a moving object and then merge them together into one image Animated photo Use this to create a picture in which a few Selected static objects move by animating objects detected by the device Golf Use this feature to take pictures of a gold swing and then play the pictures back forwards or backwards Rich tone HDR Use this to take photos with richer colors and contrasts by merging images taken at different exposure levels Eraser Saves the best of 5 taken pictures and removes any passers by Panorama Use this to take wide panoramic photos Press the Shutter button to take a photo and then move the camera in any direction When the blue frame aligns with the preview screen the camera automatically takes another shot in the panoramic sequence To stop shooting press the Shutter button again Surround shot Use this to take a 360 degree pictures that are then used to create a spherical panorama Sports Use this to take fast action photos 2 From the top of the camera the following shortcuts are available for the camera E Focus area displays the area of the image used as the main focus area If the image is too close
2. Note After typing an initial uppercase character tap B to toggle capitalization All lowercase Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase tf Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase All Uppercase t Displays when all characters will be entered as uppercase characters By default the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the following letters are lowercased After a character is entered the cursor automatically advances to the next space Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keyboard 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap to configure the keyboard for ABC mode Once in this mode the text input type shows Note After typing an initial uppercase character the I key changes to T and all letters that follow are in lower case 3 Enter your text using the on screen keyboard If you make a mistake tap to erase a single character Touch and hold ae to erase an entire word 4 Tap A Send to deliver the message Entering Text 77 Using SymbollNumeric Mode Use the Symbol Numeric Mode to add numbers symbols or emoticons While in this mode the text mode key displays LA 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard Rotate the phone counterclockwise to a landscap
3. eee ee eee ee 165 Hangouts 2 00222 dyanuddatate teenies 167 HOP sco neben Eine ien eee boss 168 Internet sss eco lese deca ent 168 KNOX qe 175 Lookout Security 005 176 Maps scorre und abso senna 176 Messages 000 cece cece eee 178 Messenger 000 cece eeeeee 178 Mobile HotSpot 005 179 MUSIC 2 eps eR Dt AURORA 179 Using Playlists 0000055 182 Creating a Playlist 182 Transferring Music Files 183 Removing Music Files 184 MyFil8S osuere ens 184 My Magazine ssssesesseessese 185 PENR usc eerte e eoe ans 186 PRONG PT 187 Play Books saai es aaa a 187 Play Games onnon nannaa 187 Play Magazines ssssssssee 188 Play Movies amp TV annann 188 Play MUSIC ion bene v dhbe nits 189 Play Store 0 2 eee eee 191 Downloading a New Google Application 191 Launching an Installed Google Application 193 POLARIS Office 5 194 S Heati 2r IR Rb ee eee een 195 SNOT Sic att ton tne the del del Ace ee 196 STranslator 00000eeeeeeee 197 SNOIGE int dee aonn aye e ree inre 198 Samsung Apps 0000eeee 199 Samsung Hub 2 000000ee 200 Samsung Link 000000 203 Scrapbook 0000 eee cece 207 SOMINGS eaei ge daa fae Trot a 207 SketchBook for Galaxy 207 4 Story Album 2 2
4. 7 Tap Download offline speech recognition to enable speech recognition via locally stored files so that even if you are not connected to a network you can still use the service Handwriting Language Search 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab gt Language and input gt Language 2 Select an available language Configuring Voice Input Recognition This feature allows the device to correctly recognize verbal input 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab gt Language and input 2 Tap Voice search to configure the following Language choose a language for your voice input Speech output Sets whether you will use speech output always or only when using hands free Block offensive words enable or disable blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of your voice input Google searches Hotword detection enable to being able to launch voice search by saying the word Google Download offline speech recognition enables voice input while offline Bluetooth headset records audio through a connected Bluetooth headset 3 Press SD to return to the previous screen Configuring Text to speech This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of on screen data such as messages and incoming caller information This action is called TTS Text To Speech 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab gt Language and input Text to speech options 2 Select a current Prefe
5. 111 Text Templates 0 cee ceca 111 Using Effiall s 2 2420 rompen 111 Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook 117 Section 7 Multimedia 122 Assigning the Default Storage Location 122 Using the Camera 000000ee 123 Camera Options 04 124 Quick Settings 00005 126 Camera and Camcorder Settings 128 Using the Camcorder 131 Sharing Pictures 134 Editing a Photo 0005 141 The Gallery ssesseeeeeesssse 143 AllShare Cast Hub 04 143 Section 8 Applications and Development ese 145 Applications 00000 ee ee 145 Application Folders 147 Action Memo 2 2000005 148 Bloomberg 00000 cece eee 149 Calculator secies zle mte 150 Calendar 00000000 eee 150 Camera 2 ce 153 ChatON 0 0c cece eee eee 153 CROMO i e pb emm Res 155 CLOCK esce Sau seals dares EET ES 156 Contacts 0 eee eee 158 Downloads 0 00 eee eee 159 DIOP DOX i facets b tt ue 159 Emil eR ens RR RRDeE ATA 161 Evernote cic tse cook WA SE RA 161 Flipboard 50 tot ed hen eme s 161 Gallery sco id READER ERA 161 Gmail gaie eoe pibe roi er P denies 162 Go0gle sarnane ened e n 162 Google Settings 000 164 GOOGIC IE 164 Group Play
6. Composing Exchange Email gt Email m For more information refer to Composing Email on page 114 Deleting an Exchange Email Message Touch and hold an email from your inbox list and select Delete from the on screen context menu With the email message displayed tap iu Delete Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap ER gt Email Tap the Microsoft Exchange account Press and then tap Settings and alter any of the available General settings For more information refer to Configuring Email Settings on page 115 or From the Home screen press el and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Accounts gt Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Alter any of the following settings Sync settings to configure the following sync options Sync Email enables automatic email synching between your device and the remote server Sync schedule allows you to control the email sync schedule on both Peak and Off Peak times Period to sync email to assign the sync range for your incoming and outgoing email messages between your phone and your extemal exchange server How many days worth of email messages should the phone and server synchronize Choose from Automatic All 1 day 3 days 1 week 2 weeks or 1 month Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction Em
7. These notifications appear at the top left of the screen within the Status bar area and display important user information This information can be accessed by swiping down from the Status bar page 33 Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the device such as communication coverage Bluetooth 46 3G Wi Fi communication battery levels GPS etc Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information about notifications and device status and allows access to application Widgets Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen width to provide more space for adding icons widgets and other customization features There are six available extended screens panels each of which may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets These screens share the use of the five Primary Shortcuts The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a white square Up to seven 7 total screens are available Note Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all screens Google search is an on screen Internet search engine powered by Google Tap to access the Voice Actions feature where you can verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search Tap Voice Actions to launch the function from within this Google widget Widgets are self contained on screen applications not shortcuts These can be placed onto any of the available screens
8. From the Home screen tap From the Contacts List press and then tap Import Export gt Export to SD card Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries Synchronizing Contacts Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote accounts to your phone Prior to syncing you must first have an active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current Contact entries and be signed into your account via the phone With syncing any Contacts entries with phone numbers email addresses pictures etc are updated and synced with your device 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt SS General tab gt Accounts and then navigate to the My accounts area 2 Select the email account containing the contacts you wish to synchronize 3 Tap gt within the adjacent account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen e f CY appears within the adjacent account field this indicates a Sync error 4 To synchronize only Contacts toggle the active state of the Sync Contacts field A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Note The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes If after 10 20 minutes your list has not been updated repeat step 2 3 5 Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact information Note Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail a
9. Note The application lets you view supported image files and text files on both your internal storage and microSD card 184 Opening and Navigating within Files DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the device These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location To open files 1 From the Home screen tap EHI Apps gt Samsung folder gt Ec My Files 2 Tapa folder and scroll down or up until you locate your selected file Home tab A allows you to back up to the root directory Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory Press I and then tap View as to change the way the files are displayed on screen Choose from List List and details or Thumbnail e Press for these additional options Select item Create folder Sort by Add shortcut and Settings To navigate 1 Tap All gt Device storage SD memory card to see the contents of either device or your internal SD card 2 The following folders may display ShareShot displays the files shared via a group share shot Session Alarms this folder contains any alarm files you may have Android the Android folder stores files that are used in Android applications Bluetooth this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device DCIM this is the default location for pictures and videos taken by the device Tap DCIM gt Camera to view the picture or video files Download this
10. and then tap Advanced Configure the settings as desired The available Wi Fi connection are displayed with a security type displayed next to them Network Notification By default when Wi Fi is on you receive notifications in the Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi Fi network You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to receive notifications 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi 2 Press and then tap Advanced 3 Tap Network notification A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Network notification is active 4 Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark and deactivate this feature Passpoint Wi Fi CERTIFIED Passpoint allows users connect to Wi Fi hotspot networks by simplifying the process of connecting to the correct network In addition this connection type provides WPA2 security protection for safe data communication Mobile devices such as handsets and tablets that are certified for Passpoint can still be used in existing hotspots Users on passpoint enabled hotspots will also enjoy Wi Fi roaming 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi 2 Press and then tap Advanced 3 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Passpoint slider to the right to turn it on 4 Tap the Passpoint field and begin the on screen process of connecting to a compatible AP Sorting your Wi Fi Entry List 1 From the main Settings page
11. 1 Select a language from the associated field English is the default language Note If you are visually impaired or have difficulty hearing tap Accessibility to configure the accessibility settings 2 Tap Next and follow the on screen setup instructions Note You may be prompted with a notification that your activation is completed Note Enabling Google location services can drain battery power For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 297 Important The device name is also used to provide an identification for your device s Bluetooth and Wi Fi Direct names 3 Tap Finish to complete the setup process 4 Read the on screen Collect diagnostics information Note This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that T Mobile technicians can better troubleshoot issues with your device 5 Select either More Info to read additional information or Close to close the message screen Important Selecting Close only closes the current description screen and does not disable data collection To disable data collection see Collect Diagnostics on page 303 Restarting the Device 1 Press and hold eme Power End until the Device options screen appears 2 Tap Restart 2 Locking and Unlocking the Device By default the device screen locks when the backlight turns off m Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any of the directions shown unlo
12. 24 consecutive hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond the thirty 30 day rental window Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers you can download Media Content to your TV using HDMI connections otherwise you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your mobile device output 4 1 2013 Samsung Link This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile phone with your TV streams content and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real time on screen monitoring Samsung s Samsung Link makes staying connected easy Allows users to share their in device media content with other external devices using DLNA certified Digital Living Network Alliance Devices These external devices must also be DLNA compliant Wi Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer AllShare Samsung Link Definitions Samsung Link This new feature builds on the AllShare Play previous AllShare Play functionality It includes features such as Web storage integration and social networking integration This is a Web service that requires using a Samsung account Group Play A subset feature of Samsung Link this allows you to mirror photos and multimedia presentations with other members of your current Wi Fi group Users must be on the same Wi Fi and provide an access code to join the group AllShare Cast with Hub accessory This feature f
13. 3 Locate and activate the Spam settings option 110 4 Tap Add to spam phrases gt Add This function allows you to assign a specific text phrase as belonging to a spam message Ex Dear friend 5 Enter a term or word into the field 6 Tap Save To register unknown numbers as spam Some incoming messages might not be associated with either a phone number or email address These incoming messages contain no information as their info is blocked by the sender 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Press i and then tap Settings More tab 3 Locate and activate the Spam settings option 4 Tap Block unknown senders A green check mark indicates the feature is active Block unknown senders when active automatically blocks incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers If an incoming message is designated in coming from an unknown sender it is automatically assigned as spam and is now located in your Spam folder Accessing Your Spam Folder Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with your Spam messages folder 1 From the Home screen tap wp 2 Press and then tap Spam messages Text Templates This screen displays your available text message reply templates This is a readily accessible list of both default and user defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to incoming messages 1 From the Home screen tap P 2 From the Messaging list press e and then tap Text
14. Action Then C S Displays on the screen status bar You are connected to the T Mobile network and can make Wi Fi calls Displays on the screen status bar The Wi Fi Calling feature is active and in use within an active call Doesnotdisplay on the screen status bar You are charged normal Calling rate minutes ES S Displays on the Screen status bar There is an error in the use or 911 registration of the Wi Fi Calling feature While Wi Fi Calling mode is active the call button shows a Wi Fi indicator Ed When Wi Fi Calling is disabled the call button goes back to show normal operation Near Field Communication This feature is used to read and exchange tags When used in conjunction with Android Beam your device can be used to beam application content when NFC capable devices are touched 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab 2 Tap the NFC field and verify the feature is active indicated by REN Android Beam When Android Beam is activated you can beam app content to another NFC capable device by holding the devices close together You can beam browser pages YouTube videos contacts and more 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt NFC gt Android Beam 2 Tapthe OFF ON icon to turn Android Beam on 3 Touch the back of your device with another NFC capable device and the content is transferred Changing Your Settings
15. Preview only in MMS allows you to add preview the MMS message prior to delivery Add to Contacts allows you to add the sender to either a new or existing Contacts entry View contact reveals the current Contact s overview screen Add slide converts an SMS message into an MMS Multimedia message and allows you to attach an existing Slideshow Remove slide allows you to remove a previously attached slideshow Add subject allows you to enter a subject Duration 5 secs only in MMS allows you to change the duration of the image slideshow Layout bottom only in MMS allows you to change the layout Add recipients allows you to enter additional recipients to the message Scheduling allows you to schedule a time for the current message to be delivered Add to spam numbers allows you to tag a number as spam so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam folder Discard closes the current open message Note You must be logged into your Samsung account prior to using the S Translator feature Messages 101 102 Translate launches a Translate popup menu Here you can both assign the sender s original language and assign a target language for the recipient they will receive your message in the designated language Enable the translate feature then configure the available options as desired Tap OK to store the new settings Adding Additional Text You can copy
16. Understanding Your Device 19 Recording amp Playback Full HD 1080p UHD may differ by T Mobile TV market Video Chat via Google Hangouts Share Shot picture sharing functionality Camera sharing via Google Play Music multi connect Wi Fi Direct connection Wi Fi Calling via the use of a micro SIM card e S Beam file transfer technology Video Player support for PIP Picture in Picture viewing Wi Fi 802 11 A B G N AC Bluetooth v4 0 enabled NFC compatible R LED Remote Control e Full Integration of Google Mobile Services Gmail Google Google Maps Google Hangouts etc Multiple Messaging Options Text Picture Video Messaging and Google Hangouts Corporate and Personal Email Music Player with multitasking features e Pre loaded e reader applications such as Play Books and Play Magazines Assisted GPS Navigation Webkit based browser Expandable memory slot supports up to 64GB microSD Mobile HotSpot and USB Tethering capability 20 Front View The following illustrations show the main elements of your device The following list correlates to the illustrations 1 Indicator light illuminates with a series of distinct colors and flashing patterns to indicate different notifications and statuses Events include Charging Low battery and Missed event Powering on blue blinks animates Battery Charging red remains on Battery Fully Charged green
17. Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery crop the image and tap Done Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds once done tap Set wallpaper Tap Wallpapers scroll through the images tap a wallpaper image then tap Set wallpaper Note Wallpapers supports the following image types JPEG PNG GIF BMP and WBMP To change Wallpapers from Settings Menu 1 Note The Home and lock screens is an additional option that From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Wallpaper or Touch and hold an empty area of the screen and select Set wallpaper Choose from Home screen Lock screen or Home and lock screens allows you to change both screens at the same time 3 Select a wallpaper type Gallery Live wallpaper or Wallpapers 4 Choose an image and tap Done or Set wallpaper To change the current Lock screen wallpaper 1 Navigate to any screen touch and hold an empty area of the screen and tap Set wallpaper Lock screen or From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Wallpaper Lock screen Select a Wallpaper type Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery crop the image and tap Done Tap Travel wallpaper to display recommended destination images on your lock screen Select a slideshow interval Tap Wallpapers scroll through the images tap a wallpaper image then tap Set wallpaper
18. This tab provides both the ability to alter input parameters such as Language and input Voice control Hands free mode S Pen One handed operation Air gesture Air view Air command Motions Palm motion Smart screen and Increase touch sensitivity General General This tab provides access to the remaining set of device settings not listed under the other tabs These include Accounts Cloud Backup and reset Date and time Accessory Application manager Battery Power saving mode Storage Security and About device Note The settings for your device are described below using the order in which they appear in the Settings menu Functions found under the Connections tab are listed first followed by My device Accounts and More tabs Wi Fi Settings This section describes the Wi Fi settings About Wi Fi Wi Fi short for wireless fidelity is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local Area Networks WLAN Wi Fi communication requires access to an existing and accessible Wireless Access Point WAP These WAPs can either be Open unsecured as within most Hot Spots or Secured requiring knowledge of the Router name and password Note After you complete a connection to an active Wi Fi network the Wi Fi Calling feature will automatically be enabled Activating Wi Fi 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Connections tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to
19. allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a limited set of phone numbers Enabling FDN 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings gt Fixed dialing numbers 2 Tap Turn on FDN 3 At the prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock Contact customer service for assistance Changing the PIN2 Code 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings Fixed dialing numbers Tap Change PIN2 At the prompt enter your old PIN2 code At the prompt enter a new PIN2 code Confirm your PIN2 code Changing Your Settings 279 oP en Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Managing the FDN List When this feature is enabled you can make calls only to phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings gt Fixed dialing numbers 2 Tap Turn on FDN 3 At the prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK FDN is enabled 4 Tap FDN list then press and then tap Add contact or edit the contacts that were stored 280 Important Not all
20. 020000005 263 Wallpaper IA 269 POM peste int ntt Set ous IU ase 269 Notification Panel slsssssse 270 Easy Mode 0 0000 ee eee 270 Accessibility Settings 271 Call Settings i 2 moie 273 Blocking Mode 00000 282 Language and Input Settings 283 Voice Control 00 288 Hands free Mode 005 289 S Pen Settings 289 One Handed Operation 290 Motions and Gestures Settings 290 Add ACCOURIE 5o co agate ay ans ets 295 Cloud 65s ok Bet EE eee 298 Backup and Reset 0 000 298 Backing up Your Data Before Factory Reset 299 Date and Time 00005 304 Accessory 1 eee eects 304 Application Manager 305 Battery Usage 0000 eee eee 307 Power Saving Mode 308 SD Card amp Device Storage 308 SECUN 3 25 re cata nar ees ee 310 About Device 00 313 Software Update 314 Section 11 Health and Safety Other Important Safety Information 337 Information eernnnnrnnnnnnnns 315 Section 12 Warranty Information 339 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 315 Standard Limited Warranty 339 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification End User License Agreement for Software 344 Inform
21. 2 Touch and hold an entry to access the entry specific context menu 3 Tap Copy to dialing screen 4 Editthe number gut the on screen keypad or delete digits by pressing to erase the numbers 5 Tap ES once the number has been changed Call Functions and Contacts List 71 Erasing the Call logs List You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current entries from the Logs list To clear a single entry from the list 1 2 From the Home screen tap gt Logs tab Touch and hold an entry and select Delete gt Delete To clear all entries from the list Pon 72 From the Home screen tap gt Logs tab Press and then tap Delete Tap Select all Tap Delete Delete to continue with the erasure or Tap Cancel to stop the current process Call Duration 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap gt Logs tab Press and then tap Call duration The following times are displayed for Voice and Data Last call shows the length of time for the last call Dialed calls shows the total length of time for all calls made Received calls shows the total length of time for all calls received All calls shows the total length of time for all calls made and received You may reset these times to zero by pressing then tapping Reset Section 4 Entering Text This section describes how to select the desired text input method when entering characters into your devi
22. 3 Tap to begin searching for both free and paid ebooks 4 Follow the on screen prompts to download the ebook to your device Play Games This applciations take you directly to the Play STore Games area from where you can purchase 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt fv Google folder gt X Play Games 2 Accept the Mobile terms of service for Google by tapping Accept 3 Select from an available on screen option Applications and Development 187 Play Magazines With Google Play Magazines you can subscribe to your favorite magazines and have them available to read on your device at any time or any place 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt Ev Google folder gt E Play Magazines 2 Logon to your Google account if you have not already done so For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 297 3 Atthe Welcome display tap the shop icon Cl to browse the full catalog Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept 5 Sweep the screen to the left or right to view Categories Featured Top Selling and New Arrivals 6 Tap a magazine to see more information and subscribe 7 Follow the on screen instructions to subscribe to a magazine 188 Play Movies amp TV This application allows you to connect to the Play Store download a movie and then watch it instantly Choose from thousands of movies including new releases and HD titles in the Play Store and stre
23. An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing applications such as Samsung Hub Note The Samsung account application will manage your access to the previously mentioned applications and there is no longer a need to remember different passwords for each application 1 From the Home screen press ell and then tap Settings gt SSS General tab 2 Navigate to the Accounts area and then tap Add account gt Samsung account 3 If you have previously created a Samsung account tap Sign in or General If this is your first time tap Create new account 4 Follow the on screen instructions Note You may be prompted to confirm your credentials via email 5 If prompted follow the on screen instructions to verify your account via the provided email address Note Without confirming your email address and following the documented procedures related applications will not function properly since it is Samsung account that is managing their username and password access Changing Your Settings 297 Cloud This feature allows you to use your external cloud storage solution to both synchronize your device to your Samsung account and then backup that local content to the cloud Your device comes with a built in Cloud storage solution known as Dropbox Important This feature requires an active Wi Fi connection prior to use 1 Log into your Samsung account and verify it is active For more information
24. Direct pen input etc 1 Tapan entry to select an item Basics provides basic information on using your device 2 Sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down Applications provides information on how to use basic motion to scroll through a website applications like Contacts Email Internet Camera etc 3 Toreturn to a previous page tap nm Settings provides information on settings for Wi Fi Bluetooth 4 To move forward to a Web page tap B Mobile HotSpot Ringtone Power saving mode NFC Screen Mirroring and Voice control Online help provides more detailed online help for additional questions you may have 168 Browser Options 1 From the top of the browser screen select one of the available options Navigation use the forward and back buttons to navigate through your browsing activity Refresh reloads the current page Windows displays a list of the windows you have open Bookmarks provides access to the Bookmarks screen or From the home page press f to access the following options Homepage displays the home Web page New window launches a new browser window By default this screen shows the home page Add bookmark allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list Edit bookmark allows you to edit a previously added bookmark Add shortcut to home allows you to add a shortcut to your Home screen Share via allows you to share the page using Add t
25. From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Application manager 2 Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Uninstall Clear data Clear cache or Clear defaults Uninstalling Third party Applications Important You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Application manager 2 Tap the DOWNLOADED tab and select your desired application 3 Tap Uninstall from within the top area of the Application info page 4 Atthe prompt tap OK to uninstall the application Changing Your Settings 305 5 Select a reason for uninstalling the application then 3 To switch the order of the lists displayed in the tap OK Downloaded tabs press and select Sort by size Memory Usage or Sort by name See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running 4 Tap an application to view and update information applications about the application including memory usage default 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt settings and permissions Applications manager Running Services 2 Tap DOWNLOADED SD CARD RUNNING or ALL to The Running services option allows you to view and control display memory usage for that category of currently running services such as Backup Google Hangouts applications SNS messaging Swype and more The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows 1 From the main Settings page tap Gener
26. Note If your share folder is located on your computer you will momentarily receive an on screen popup notifying you that a new image was uploaded to your shared Dropbox folder Email Email enables you to review and create email using most email services The device alerts you when you receive an email message m From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt O Email For more information refer to Using Email on page 111 Evernote This application allows you to easily remind yourself of things across all of your current devices Evernote lets you create to do lists take pictures record voice memos and write reminders to yourself These notes are both accessible and searchable from any location that is accessible by your device 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt Galaxy Plus folder gt Evernote Note If prompted for an update follow the on screen prompts 2 Tap either CREATE ACCOUNT or SIGN IN and follow the on screen instructions Flipboard This application creates a personalized digital magazine out of everything being shared with you Access news stories personal feeds and other related material Flip through your Facebook newsfeed tweets from your Twitter account photos from friends and much more 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt Galaxy Plus folder gt F Flipboard 2 Follow the on screen instructions Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For pho
27. Responsible Listening Caution Avoid potential hearing loss Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds over time The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played louder and for longer durations Prolonged exposure to loud sounds including music is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices such as portable music players and cell phones at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise induced hearing loss This includes the use of headphones including headsets earbuds and Bluetooth or other wireless devices Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus a ringing in the ear hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing Individual susceptibility to noise induced hearing loss and potential hearing problem varies Additionally the amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound the device settings and the headphones that are used As a result there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound settings and equipment You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which yo
28. Search the Internet To perform an Internet search using keywords 1 From within the Google search application tap the Google search field enter the keyword s to search using the on screen keypad 2 Tap the entry from the list of search results that are displayed 3 Tapa link to view the website 170 Adding and Deleting Windows You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time To add a new window 1 From your browser window tap Window gt F gt 1 New window 2 Anew browser window displays Note The number of currently open windows is displayed at the bottom of the Windows screen 3 Scroll across the screen to view the currently active windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet window To delete an existing window 1 From your browser window tap Windows 2 Scroll across the available windows and locate your target window 3 Tap e next to the listing to delete the window Going Incognito The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites outside of the normal browsing Pages viewed in this incognito window won t appear within your browser history or search history and no traces such as cookies are left on your device Note Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your device after you exit the incognito mode To add a new incognito window 1 From your browser window press and select Incognito mode 2 Atthe information prompt tap OK 3 Anew
29. Tap Add new device to add devices to the allowed for connection list Enter the Device name and Mac address Tap OK to save the new device Connections 227 Section 10 Changing Your Settings This section explains the device settings for your device It includes such settings as display security memory and any LEE Connections 1 1 H Connections extra settings associated with your device This tab allows you to see all of settings related Accessing the Settings Tabs to the connection of your device to external m From the Home screen tap Hr Apps gt Sources Features include Wi Fi Bluetooth re Gettings Tethering and Mobile HotSpot Airplane mode Data usage Location services More networks don m Mobile networks VPN and Wi Fi Calling NFC From the Home screen press SW gt and then S Beam Nearby devices and Screen Mirroring tap Settings The four available tabs are then displayed The Dens mE previous Settings list is now broken down into four This tab provides access to display configuration and customization features Features include Sound Display Multi window LED indicator Settings Tabs Overview Lock screen Wallpaper Font Notification panel The Settings are divided into 4 main groups When the Easy mode Accessibility Call and Blocking mode Settings screen displays the following tabs are located at the top of the screen available tabs described below 228 EE Controls
30. Tap the Hearing aids field to improve the sound quality of your device for use with hearing aids Tap Flash notification to allows you to set your camera light to blink whenever you receive a notification Enable the Assistant menu to allow you to improve the device accessibility for users with reduced dexterity Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on Follow the on screen instructions Tap the Press and hold delay field to select a time interval for this action Choose from Short 0 5 Medium 1 0 second Long 1 5 seconds or Custom Enable Interaction control to allows you to enable or disable motions and screen timeout You can also block areas of the screen from touch interaction Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on Follow the on screen instructions Call Settings To access the Call settings menu 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Press and then tap Call settings or From the Home screen press eil and then tap Settings gt Device tab gt Call Configuring General Call Settings Configure the general call settings using this option 1 From the Home screen press i and then tap Settings gt Device tab gt Call 2 Tap one of the following options Call rejection allows you to manage your rejection mode and rejection list Auto reject mode sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or messages Auto reject list provides access to current rejecti
31. Threaded messages allow you to see all the miy messages exchanged similar to a chat program and displays a contact on the screen Message threads are listed in the order in which they were received with the latest message displayed at the top To reply to a text message is 1 From the Home screen Reply Bubble tap wu 2 While the message is open tap the Enter message field and then type your reply message 3 Compose your reply Current Recipient My Text Text Message Thread Messages 103 Tap A Send to deliver your reply Press and then select one of the available message options page 99 To access message thread options 104 From the main Messaging screen touch and hold the message to display the following options View contact displays the Contact s Overview page Addto contact begins the process of adding the new number to your Contacts list Delete deletes the currently selected message thread Add to spam numbers adds the current sender to a spam list ny new texts from this sender are automatically blocked To access additional Bubble options Touch and hold the message bubble within an active message conversation to display the following options Delete deletes the currently selected message bubble from the thread Copy copies the currently selected message bubble from the thread Forward allows you to forward the currently selected message bubble to an ext
32. When enabled via the Air view mode menu tap the Air view finger options field and configure the available options To activate Air Command With the Air command feature active the Air Command button toolbar appears once you remove the S Pen from its slot This toolbar allows you to quickly activate frequently used applications or actions 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Air command slider to the right to turn it on To activate Motion 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Motions slider to the right to turn it on 3 Read the on screen notification and tap OK Note At least one feature must be activated before Motion can be activated 4 Inasingle motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position The following is a description some of the most commonly used gestures Direct call Once enabled the device will dial the currently displayed on screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear Smart alert Once enabled pickup the device to be alerted and notified of you have missed any calls or messages Zoom Once enabled you must be on a screen where content can be zoomed In a single motion touch and hold two points on the display then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out Changing Your Settings 293 Browse an image Once enabled touch and hold a de
33. account from where your style and existing contact information is added to your personal dictionary Helps recognize familiar names Learn from Twitter allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account and add used text to your personal dictionary Learn from Messages allows your device to learn you messaging style by using your Messaging information Learn from Contacts updates predictive style by learning your Contacts style Clear remote data allows you to delete your anonymous data stored on the personalization server Clear personal data removes all personalized data entered by the user Changing Your Settings 285 4 Privacy displays on screen privacy information Press gt to return to the previous screen Configure Google Voice Typing 1 286 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab gt Language and input zug From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select 2222 Select input method Set up input methods Tap E31 adjacent to the Google voice typing field Select a language by tapping Choose input languages area Remove the check mark from the Automatic field This allows you to select additional languages Select the desired languages Activate Block offensive words to block recognition of known offensive words or language A blue check mark indicates the feature is active
34. contact displays in the recipient field Delete any unnecessary members by tapping their name number in the recipient area and selecting Delete recipient field or and selecting recipien Tap the Enter message field and use the on s Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter ts creen keypad to enter a message For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 73 message and select one of the following opti Tap e Attach to add an attachment to your ons Image allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to add it to your message Take a picture allows you to temporarily exit the message take a photo with phone s camera and then add it message by tapping Save Video allows you to choose an existing video from list then add it to your message Record video allows you to temporarily exit the m to your the Videos essage record a video clip using the phone s camera and then add it to your message by tapping Save Audio allows you to choose an existing audio file Tom the Audio list then add it to your message by tapping the right of the audio so that it tums green then tay he circle to pping Done Record audio allows you to temporarily exit the message and record an audio clip using the phone s microphone It is then automatically attached to the message S Note allows you to add an S Note that you have created
35. events Calendars allows you to view the current Calendar accounts Settings displays a list of configurable settings Creating a Calendar Event 1 From the Home screen tap H E Calendar 2 Within the Year Month Week and Day tabs Create event to create a new Calendar event Apps gt Enabling the Handwriting mode 1 From the Home screen tap H Apps gt diiit 31 Calendar 2 Tap Bg Enable Handwriting to edit the on screen Calendar by adding hand written information 3 Use the following functions Allows you to add free format drawing KJ Allows you to erase marks and drawings Undo the last action Redo the last action that was undone Exits the current action and returns to the Calendar application Saves the current updates Applications and Development 151 Calendar Settings Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which you want the calendar to begin You also select how you want to view the calendar by Month Week or Day or determine how to manage events notifications sounds and defaults reminders 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt a 2 Press I gt Settings 3 Tap View styles and select an option Tap Month view styles and select an option Tap Week view and select a type 4 Tap First day of week and select either Locale default Saturday Sunday or Monday 5 Tap Hide declined events to activate this option A check mark indicates selec
36. read the screen lock information and follow the on screen steps to setup an unlock PIN or password 3 Tap E add VPN network Changing Your Settings 251 4 Inthe form that appears fill in the information provided by your network administrator 5 Tap Save Note Similar setup process can be used for all available VPN types Connecting to a VPN 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt VPN 2 Tap the VPN entry you want to connect to 3 Enter any requested credentials into the pop up that opens 4 Tap Connect Edit a VPN 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt VPN Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit In the pop up that opens select Edit network Make the desired VPN setting changes Tap Save gp wn 252 Delete a VPN 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt VPN 2 Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete 3 Tap Delete network within the pop up that opens up Wi Fi Calling Wi Fi Calling is a free feature for T Mobile customers using this device with the new SIM card Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes The benefits of Wi Fi Calling include the following Wi Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your
37. source device Pull them apart Verify the image is visible in the preview window on the source device providing the file Place them together again 8 From the Touch to beam screen tap the reduced image preview to begin the transfer After a few seconds depending on file size the recipient with then see the transferred file displayed on their screen Multimedia 137 To share multiple pictures via S Beam 1 138 On the source device containing the desired image or video tap Apps 2 xs Gallery Locate the selected folder Touch and hold the first image and place a check mark on it and all desired images Place the two active NFC enabled devices back to back to begin From the Touch to beam screen tap the reduced image preview to begin the transfer When prompted separate the two devices Camera Gallery Options The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera images 1 From the Home screen tap TH Apps gt Dd Gallery Select a folder location ex Camera and tap an image to open it or Touch and hold an image to place a checkmark alongside the file and select multiple files or Tap the upper right camera to begin taking pictures that are placed in this folder or Tap the on screen image to use additional image menu options For more information refer to Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options on page 130 Sharing a Gallery Image to a Target D
38. tap the Speak English US button and wait for m From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt the text to appear on screen E Samsung folder gt e S Voice 5 Press for additional options Choose from Using S Voice TTS readout speed Auto readout and Help 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt E Samsung folder gt e S Voice 2 Readthe on screen disclaimer information and tap Confirm to continue 3 Review the Terms of Service and tap Agree to continue 198 4 Navigate through the following on screen tutorial screens by reading the information and tapping Next or tap Skip to continue without reading the information 5 Wake up the application by repeating the phrase Hi Galaxy Note The wake up command phrase can be changed from Hi Galaxy to anything else 6 Tap Speak if the device does not hear you or to give it a command Example 1 want to find the best pizza online e Tap and say Find me the best Pizza This launches an Internet search Example 2 want to go to Cambridge e Tap and say Navigate to Cambridge This launches the Map application and indicates where this is in relation to your current position Samsung Apps Allows you to easily download an abundance of applications that are directly compatible with your device This includes games news reference social networking navigation and more Samsung Apps makes your Smartphone smarter Note Access to this feat
39. the Border button Q 2 Locate and tap Tile windows If the selected area contains more than one app they will then appear as on screen pop ups 3 Tap the upper right of the po up to exit the app Creating a Customized Multi Window Preset 1 Arrange the Multi window view as desired app location high of windows etc 1 Once configured tap More gt B Create 2 Usethe on screen keyboard to name the new preset of paired windows 3 Tap OK The new preset then appears at the top of the Multi window list of apps 54 Menu Navigation You can tailor the device s range of functions to fit your needs using both menus and applications Menus sub menus and features are accessed by scrolling through the available on screen menus Your device defaults with seven screens Navigating Through the Application Menus There are three default Application Menu screens available As you add more applications from the Play Store more screens are created to house these new apps 1 From the Home screen tap Apps The first Application Menu screen displays To close the Applications screen press III Home 2 Sweep the screen to access the other menus 3 Tap any of the on screen icons to launch the associated application Using Sub Menus Sub menus are available from within most screen and applications 1 Press A sub menu displays at the bottom of the Screen 2 Tap an available on screen option Usin
40. the correct TV IR codes were selected Note The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10 seconds Please do not press the button again If the TV turned on tap Yes this code 1 works or If the TV did not turn on after tapping Power and waiting 10 seconds tap No test next code 2 or Send this code 1 again From the Select your channel source screen select the entry that corresponds to your current channel control method e Set top Box selected when changing channels is done via a receiver box Channels are not changed via the TV remote but rather through the receiver box e My xxx TV selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV and no box is used Channels are changed directly on the TV by using the TV remote and not a box s remote Note Try matching your current channel selection method 6 Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list For example DirectTV e f your brand does not appear in the list tap Show other brands and follow the on screen instructions Important You must configure your set top box for IR communication with your device If you do not select More info below and follow the on screen instructions you may not be able to properly use the application 7 When prompted to Enable IR tap More info to learn how to configure your set top box to receive and respond to IR controls 8 Only after completing the IR setup process confimration the IR codes function
41. 17 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 322 Configuration Initial 16 Connections Accessing the Internet 168 Contact Copying to microSD Card 90 Copying to SIM Card 90 Creating a New 80 Linking 86 New From Keypad 82 Photo 140 Contact Entry Options 86 Contact List Business Cards 84 Options 84 Contact Menus Options 85 Contacts Adding a Number to Existing 83 Additional Options 92 Deleting 84 Display Options 92 93 Displaying Contacts by Name 93 355 Export List to microSD 299 First Name 93 Groups 94 Import from microSD 300 Last Name First 93 Merge with Samsung Account 84 Sending All 89 Setting Default Location 85 Settings 93 Share Via 85 Sharing Settings 93 Sharing Sending 89 Contacts List 56 Context Menus 83 85 Navigation 55 Using 55 Cookies Emptying 173 Copying Contact 90 Create Folder Group Apps 146 Creating a Playlist 182 Creating and sending Messages 98 356 Customizing Home screens 34 D Data Auto Sync Data 246 Restrict Background Data 246 Data Limit Setting 246 Data Roaming 248 Activate Deactivate 246 248 Data Usage Cycle 246 Limiting 246 Date Selecting Format 304 Date and Time 304 Default Storage Assigning 122 Camcorder 122 Camera 122 Deleting Message Bubbles 105 Message Threads 105 Deleting a contact 84 Deregister Web Storage 206 Device Reset 302 Device Name Edit 313 Device Options Screen 258 Disable Applications 146 Disabled Applications Show 146 Display Icons
42. 2 2 2c eee eee eee 208 T Mobile My Account 208 T Mobile Name ID 0000 209 T Mobile TV 0 0 cece eee 209 TripAdvisor 00 c eee eee 210 Video o n eee ee eee 210 Visual Voicemail 00 00s 212 Voice Recorder 000005 213 Voice Search 000 cece eens 215 VPN Client 000000 cee 215 WatchON 0 cece cece eae 216 YouTube si dsaddapde bec ei oe 220 Section 9 Connections 222 PC Connections cee eens 222 Enabling the USB 3 0 Connection 223 USB Tethering 0055 223 Mobile HotSpot 22 225 Section 10 Changing Your Settings 228 Accessing the Settings Tabs 228 Settings Tabs Overview 228 Wi Fi Settings 00000eeeee 229 Bluetooth settings 236 Tethering and Mobile HotSpot 241 Airplane Mode suuuueeesse 245 Data Usage 00 246 Location Services 0005 247 More Networks sseseeses 248 Near Field Communication 255 S Beam i eu ex e Cor wee oh 256 Nearby Devices 256 Screen Mirroring 257 Sound Settings 258 Display Settings 00 261 Multi window 0000000 262 LED Indicator llle 262 Lock Screen
43. 24 Status Bar 24 Using Negative Colors 272 Display Touch Screen 327 Display Settings 261 Displaying your phone number 56 Do cell phones pose a health hazard 315 Dock Sound 304 Downloading New application 191 Downloads 159 Draft Messages 100 Dropbox 205 Uploading Picture 160 Dual Camera 127 Relocate 127 Resize 127 Dual View see Dual Camera 127 E Easy Mode 270 EDGE Network 250 Edit Page 35 Editing a Picture 141 Email 111 Changing Signature 116 119 Composing 114 Configuring Settings 115 Creating a Spam List 115 Creating an Internet Account 112 Internet Email 112 Opening 113 Refreshing Messages 114 Sending 92 Wi Fi Download of Attachments 116 120 Emergency Alert Preview 108 Alerts 108 Emergency Alert Configuration 108 Emergency Alerts 108 AMBER 108 Imminent Extreme 108 Message Settings 108 Severe 108 Emergency Calls 329 Making 58 With SIM 58 Without SIM 58 Emoticons 101 Ending A call 57 Entering Text 73 Erasing Files Memory Card 309 Evernote 161 Excercise Risks 195 Exchange Email 117 Account Setup 117 Composing 118 Configuring Settings 119 Deleting Message 119 Opening 118 Refreshing Messages 118 Exercising Before You Start 195 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 315 Extreme Alert Disable 109 F Facebook Personalize 285 Predictive Text 285 Factory Data Reset 302 Prior To 299 Favorites Tab 96 357 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices 335 FCC No
44. Displays when a call is in progress x Displays when a call was missed Call Functions and Contacts List 69 Accessing the Logs Tab 1 From the Home screen tap gt V Logs tab a Logs 2 Tap an entry to view available options Note The Logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is turned on If a call is received while it is turned off it will not be included in your calling history Each entry contains the phone number if it is available and Contacts entry name if the number is in your Contacts Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device gt going y Indicates any received calls that were answered Ez d A Indicates a missed call Indicates any received calls that were rejected Q Indicates auto rejected calls 70 Note You can also view missed calls from within the Notifications area Select Pa and tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen Call logs Caller Overview Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the Call options Screen Create contact to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts View contact to view the Contact details for the current entry Update existing to update an existing Contacts entry with the current number Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number Send message allows you to create a new text message to the Selected entry Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration View more to view add
45. Forgot pattern Follow these steps to use either your PIN or email address Important You can only enter an incorrect lock pattern 5 times before the device is locked Important If you are unsuccessful in retrieving your lock pattern or unlocking your device please contact T Mobile for assistance To unlock your device with a PIN code 1 Tap Backup PIN located at the bottom of the screen 2 Scroll down and tap the Type PIN code field and use the on screen keypad to enter the backup PIN code you setup when you created your lock pattern Tap Done If you have forgotten your current pattern tap Pattern from the Screen unlock settings menu and follow the procedures outlined in Setting an Unlock Pattern on page 265 to create a new pattern To unlock your device using your Google account 1 Tap Forgot pattern located at the bottom of the Screen Tap the Username email and Password fields use the on screen keyboard to enter your Google Account credentials and tap Sign in to complete the login process If you have forgotten your Google Account credentials visit the Google website to recover them If you still cannot get your Google Account credentials contact your wireless carrier for additional options Changing Your Settings 267 PIN Lock and Unlock 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock PIN 3 Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch Cont
46. Guide to display on your TV an on screen listing of available set top box shows For additional information on the WatchON application press i and then select Help WatchOn Settings From the main WatchON screen press E and then select an available on screen option Change room allows you to select a previously configured room Edit channels allows you to add or remove channels from your custom list Press and hold a channel number to update the channel entry Settings provides access to the Samsung WatchON settings menu About displays on screen information about the application Help displays on screen help information Personalize WatchON You can personalize your application to do things such as show content only from your selected media categories or add an additional room s set top box To configure your Just for you settings The Just for you option displays available content matching your activated media categories These categories can be configured during your initial set up or at any later time 1 Sign into your Samsung account 2 From the main WatchON screen tap Combined View gt Just for you From the On TV tab press ell and then select Settings Access parameters such as Basic info Genres and Sports to then configure and enable those parameters you would like to show in the Just for you tab Applications and Development 219 To add a new room Your device can be used to
47. Home or extended Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as Camera YouTube Contacts Phone Email Play Store etc These function the same as shortcuts on your computer Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens the majority can also be found within the Applications Screens The Application screens can be accessed by tapping ER Apps from the Primary shortcuts area Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number of times Understanding Your Device 31 Primary Shortcuts are four shortcuts present throughout all of the available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device or launch any of the following functions Phone Ww launches the phone related screen functions Keypad Logs Favorites and Contacts Contacts f launches the Contacts related screens Phone Groups Favorites and Contacts Messages launches the Messaging menu create new messages or open an existing message string Internet launches the built in Web browser Apps launches the Applications page Tap ER Apps to access the Applications screens While in the Applications screens tap SD Back to easily return to the Home screen As you transition from screen to screen a screen indicator located at the bottom displays the currently active panel 32 Home Screen Menu Settings When on the Home screen press and the
48. Lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock Retrace your current pattern on the screen 4 Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 7 from the previous section 266 Deleting the Screen Lock Pattern 1 2 3 4 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock Retrace your current pattern on the screen Tap None Pattern options Once an unlock pattern is enabled additional options are available Clock widget options allows you to show the dual clock on the lock screen adjust the Clock size and show the date Personal message allows you to enter a customized personalized message that is displayed on the lock screen Owner information allows you enter text to display on the lock Screen Make pattem visible allows you to see the pattern as you draw it Unlock effect allows you to assign an effect to the unlock Screen Choose from None or Watercolor Lock automatically allows you to set a time out for lock Screen Lock instantly with power key allows you to lock the screen by pressing emmmmmmm Action Memo on lock screen allows you to open the Action Memo when double tapping the lock screen with S Pen What If I Forget my Pattern If you forget your device s lock pattern you can unlock your device or reset it using your Google Account credentials When you enter the wrong unlock pattern too many times you should see an option at the bottom of the screen that says
49. No thanks 4 Follow the on screen instructions to use Google Chrome Applications and Development 155 Clock Here you can set an Alarm configure and view the World clock use a Stopwatch or set a Timer The applications display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger m From the Home screen tap ERR Apps gt C Clock Setting an Alarm 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt C Clock 2 From the Alarm tab tap Create alarm 3 Use the arrow symbols to enter adjust the hour and minutes then tap AM or PM toggles depending on which was last selected 4 Tapthe Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times you want this alarm to repeat Selections are day blocks or Repeat weekly Selected day blocks turn blue when active 5 Tapthe Alarm type field and select one of the following Melody Vibration or Vibration and melody 156 Tap the Alarm tone field and either select an available tone or select Add to use locate a sound to use as an alarm ringtone Tap OK to activate the ringtone Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to decrease or increase the alarm volume A sample of the volume level plays Move the Location alarm slider to the right to activate the feature then follow the on screen instructions to enter a location When activated the alarm only sounds when you are at a specific location Move the Snooze slider to the right to activ
50. SIM card messages allows you to manage the messages stored on the SIM card Message center allows you to enter the number of your message center where your messages reside while the system is attempting to deliver them Input mode allows you to set the input mode for your text messages Choose from GSM Alphabet Unicode or Automatic Multimedia message MMS settings Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered Read reports when this option is activated your phone receives a request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient Auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve messages Roaming auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve while roaming Creation mode allows you to select the creation mode Free Restricted or Warning Restricted you can only create and submit messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain Warning the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content Domain Free you may add any content to the message MMS alert alerts you when the messaging modes changes from an SMS text to MMS multimedia mode More Tab Push message settings Push messages allows you to receive push messages from the network Service loading allows you to se
51. Safety Program http www fcc gov oet rfsafety Health and Safety Information 319 Environmental Protection Agency EPA http www epa gov radtown Wireless tech html Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA http www osha gov SLTC radiofrequencyradiation Note This web address is case sensitive e National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH hitp www cdc gov niosh World Health Organization WHO http www who int peh emf en International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection hitp www icnirp de Health Protection Agency http www hpa org uk Topics Radiation US Food and Drug Administration http www fda gov Radiation EmittingProducts RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures HomeBusinessandEntertainment CellPhones default htm 320 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio Frequency RF energy set by the Federal Communications Commission FCC of the U S Government These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement NCRP and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE In both cases the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts dr
52. T Mobile Name ID application did not recognize a recent number and would like to know whether you wish to Not add or add as a New or Existing number Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event has arrived For more information refer to Calendar on page 150 Displays when an alarm is set For more information referto Setting an Alarm on page 156 Z Q Z amp amp Displays when the device is in Silent mode All sounds except media and alarms are silenced and Silent mode is set to Vibrate For more information refer to Silent mode via Device Options Screen on page 258 Displays when the device is in Silent mode All sounds are silenced and Silent mode is set to Mute Displays when data synchronization and application sync is active and synchronization is in progress for Gmail Calendar and Contacts Displays when the Blocking mode feature is active For more information refer to Blocking Mode on page 282 Displays when the Hands free Mode is active For more information refer to Hands free Mode on page 289 Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and enabled Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active and communicating with an external device Understanding Your Device 27 28 Displays when your device is actively paired and communicating with your Galaxy Gear Both devices are successfully communicating via the Gear Manage
53. USE THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Samsung grants you the following rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA You may install use access display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard disk s or other permanent storage media of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time and you may not make the Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple computers at the same time You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source licenses The open source license provisions may override some of the terms of this EULA We make the applicable open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices section of the Settings menu of your device 2 RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP Samsung reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and treaties Samsung or its suppliers own the title copyright and other intellectual property rights in the Software The Software is licensed not sold 3 LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code or
54. Understanding Your Device 39 Screen Navigation Using the touch screen display and the keys you can navigate the features of your device and enter characters The following conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation action in the procedures Navigating Through the Screens The following terms describe the most common hardware and on screen actions Press and hold Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and buttons to select or activate an item For example press the Navigation key to scroll through a menu Some buttons and keys require you to press and hold them to activate a feature for example you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the device Tap Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on the virtual QWERTY keyboard For example tap an Application icon to open the application Touch and hold Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available options or to access a pop up menu For example touch and hold from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options 40 Flick Move your finger in lighter quicker strokes than swiping This finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion such as when flicking through contacts or a message list Swipe or slide Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across the screen This allows you to move the area of focus or to scroll through a list For example slide your finger left or right on the Ho
55. WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS EXCLUSIONS AND DISCLAIMERS INCLUDING SECTIONS 10 11 12 AND 13 SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE 14 U S GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software is licensed only with restricted rights and as commercial items consisting of commercial software and commercial software documentation with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein All Products are provided only with restricted rights with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein All Software and Products are provided subject to Federal Acquisition Regulation FAR 52 227 19 15 APPLICABLE LAW This EULA is governed by the laws of the jurisdiction where you are a resident or if a resident of the United States by the laws of the state of Texas without regard to its conflict of law provisions This EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods the application of which is expressly excluded 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION a Non United States residents If a dispute controversy or difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of the Software is not amicably settled it shall be subject to the non exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction whe
56. Warranty Information 351 Index Numerics 2G Network Using Only 250 2 Sec Pause Adding 59 A Acces to My Location 177 Accessibility Text Booster 174 Accessing Voicemail 18 Accessory 304 Audio Output 304 Dock Sound 304 Action Memo 42 Creating a New Memo 148 S Pen 44 352 Add 2 Sec Pause 62 Add to Favorites 96 Adobe PDF 194 Air 41 Air Button 42 Air Call Accept 60 Air Command 42 293 Activation 47 290 On 293 Toolbar 44 Air Gesture Activate 291 Air Browse 291 Air Call Accept 291 Air Jump 291 Answering a Call 60 On 291 Quick Glance 291 292 293 295 Air View 41 47 290 292 On 292 Airplane Mode On 245 Alarm Deleting an Existing Alarm 157 Setting 156 Turning Off 157 Alerts Presidential 108 Alerts on Call 274 Allow Diagnostics 303 AllShare Cast Hub 28 Activation on Device 144 Connecting 144 Set Up Hardware 144 AllShare Play see Samsung Link 203 204 AllShareCast Hub 203 AMBER Alerts 108 Disable 109 Android Beam 255 Answering Home Key 274 276 Answering a Call 60 Application cache and data Clearing 193 Application Folders 147 Application Groups Customizing Names 148 Application Menus Navigating through 54 Applications Bloomberg 149 Calculator 150 Camera 153 Email 161 Google Mail 162 Google Maps 176 Internet 168 KNOX 175 Messages 178 Show Disabled 146 Shutting Down 147 Storage Used 307 Using the Camcorder 131 Using the Camera 123 Video 210 Voice Recorder 2
57. WatchON application setup confirm your TV is turned off Using WatchON For more information refer to www samsungwatchon com Initial Configuration 1 Sign into your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt Samsung folder gt WatchON Note If you are not connected to an active Wi Fi you may be prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile network Click Connect to proceed 3 Select your desired country or region for your TV Guide s source listing 216 Enter your current zip code and tap Done This zip code must correspond to the location of your desired TV and set top box From the Find your TV service screen select a service provider from the available channel listing From the Personalize screen you can either follow the on screen prompts to personalize your desired content or tap Skip to continue without customizing your content Read the on screen Peel Disclaimer agreement and tap Agree to complete the set up process Customizing Your Remote e 1 From the top of the main screen tap Remote Control Set Up Now From the Select your TV brand screen tap your TV s manufacturer name e f you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector Select from one of the following two options Choose from either Show other brands or I have a home projector 3 Aim your device at the TV and tap Power to confirm the set up process completed successfully and
58. administrators to begin configuring this setting 3 Select an administrator device and follow the prompts Unknown Sources Before you can download a web application you must enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading Developers can use this option to install non Play Store applications 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Security 2 Tap Unknown sources to active this feature Verify Apps Allows you to block or warn yourself before installing apps that can cause harm 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Security 2 Tap Verify apps to active this feature Note Enabling this feature can prevent installation of some applications from the Play Store Changing Your Settings 311 Change Security Level Allows you to change the current security level so taht threats that meet the selected criteria are blocked 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Security 2 Tap Change security level and select an available option High blocks all unauthenticated actions Normal blocks explicit threats Security Update Service These options allow you to configure the way in which the device checks for changes in available security policies and the method used for the update 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Security 2 Tap Auto update security to automatically check for changes to the securty policy and then download any updates automatically in order
59. allows you to merge all of your current Contact entries with either your active Google or Samsung account If several of your contacts are from other external sources this allows you to back them up or copy them to your Samsung account Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit Accounts allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on Samsung account ChatON Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync This option also allows you to manually synchronize all of your current contacts with their respective accounts For more information refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 91 Speed dial setting allows you to set up speed dialing Send message email allows you to send a text picture message or an email using your Google account Contacts to display allows you to choose to display All contacts those on your Device SIM card Samsung account Gmail or only display contacts that are part of a Customized list Settings allows you to configure where you save new contacts to or view your service numbers or send contact information Options include Only contacts with phones List by Display contacts by Service numbers and Contact sharing settings Help provides an on screen Help file that covers most high level topics for Contacts Contact Menu Options 1 2 From the Home screen tap B Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu The following options display Delete allows you to d
60. apps panel containing the scrollable apps In a single motion touch and hold a desired app until it detaches from the panel then carefully drag itto a new location in the list of apps Lift your finger or stylus off the screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new location More access to additional functions E Create create a user defined custom Create Multi window paired window T Edit edit the available Multi window apps Edit _ Help access to Help information Help To edit a Multi window application 1 2 Activate the Multi window feature Tap the tab to display the apps panel containing the scrollable apps Tap More gt Edit located at the bottom of the list to reveal a staging area on the right that can house any removed applications from the Multi window panel Tap Done once you have completed the removal process To restore a Multi window application 1 2 Activate the Multi window feature Tap the tab to display the apps panel containing the as apps Tap More gt 9 Edit located at the bottom of the list to reveal the staging area containing any previously removed apps Locate the desired application In a single motion touch and hold a desired app until it detaches from the staging area then carefully drag it to a new location in the current list of apps Understanding Your Device 51 Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the
61. as a removable disk and access the file directory If you insert a memory card in the device you can also access the files directory from the memory card by using the device as a memory card reader Note The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk separate from the internal memory 1 Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the cable to the computer After a few seconds a pop up window displays on the PC when connected 2 Open the folder to view files 3 Copy files from the PC to the memory card Enabling the USB 3 0 Connection 1 Connect the USB 3 0 cable to an active 3 0 USB port Important The 3 0 configuration screens will not be displayed if you cable is not plugged into an Active USB 3 0 port or if it is plugged into a USB 2 0 2 Inasingle motion touch and drag the Status bar to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 3 Tap the Media device USB3 0 field to place a checkmark and active the USB connectivity mode 4 Read the on screen information and tap Use USB 3 0 to initiate the mode To return to USB 2 0 connectivity mode m Tap either the MTP or PTP fields to re enable USB 2 0 connectivity USB Tethering This option allows you to share your device s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your device and a single computer The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet
62. be shared with third parties including your wireless service provider applications providers Samsung and other third parties providing services Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls When you make an emergency call the cellular network may activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the emergency responders your approximate location AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area Therefore Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your ability and Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder instructs you Navigation Maps directions and other navigation data including data relating to your current location may contain inaccurate or incomplete data and circumstances can and do change over time In some areas complete information may not be available Therefore you should always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see before following them All users should pay attention to road conditions closures traffic and all other factors that may impact safe driving or walking Always obey posted road signs Emergency Calls This mobile device like any wireless mobile device operates using radio signals wireless and landline networks as well as user programmed functions which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions areas or circumstances Therefore you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essentia
63. blocked numbers 108 Emergency Alert Configuration This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive geographically targeted messages Alert messages are provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within their area There is no charge for receiving an Emergency Alert message There are three types of Emergency Alerts Alerts issued by the President Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life AMBER Alerts missing child alert Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts Severe Alerts and AMBER Alerts Important Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled To disable Extreme Severe and AMBER Alerts 1 From the Home screen tap W Press and then tap Settings More tab 3 Scroll to the bottom and select Emergency alerts All alerts are enabled by default check mark showing 4 Taponan alert option to disable the alert and remove the check mark Assigning M
64. browser window displays To exit from the incognito window 1 From your browser window tap Windows 2 Scroll across the available windows and locate the incognito window The incognito icon appears in the upper left of the new browser window while you are in this mode 3 Tap e next to the incognito listing to delete this window Using Bookmarks While navigating a website you can bookmark a site to quickly and easily access it at a future time The URLs website addresses of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks page From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most visited websites and view your History 1 From the webpage tap Bookmarks The Bookmarks page displays 2 Press to display the following options List Thumbnail view Select Thumbnail view default to view a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed or select List view to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed Applications and Development 171 Create folder Creates a new folder in which to store new bookmarks Delete Erases selected bookmarks Change order Rearranges the current bookmarks Move to folder Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected folder Tap a bookmark to view the webpage or touch and hold a bookmark for the following options Open in new window Opens the webpage in a new window Delete Allows you to delete a bookmark For more information refer to Deleting Bookmarks o
65. card slightly out 4 Carefully slide the card out of the micro SIM card Socket Micro SIM card 2 Make sure that the card s gold contacts face into the device and that the upper left angled corner of the card is positioned as shown 10 Installing the microSD Memory Card Your device supports an optional external microSD memory cards for storage of media such as music pictures video and other files The SD card is designed for use with this mobile device and other devices Note This device supports a memory card of up to a 64GB Important The microSD memory card is inserted just above the micro SIM card Take care not to dislodge the micro SIM card during the installation of the microSD card 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Locate the microSD card slot on the inside of the device and just above the micro SIM card 3 Orient the card with the gold strips facing down 4 Carefully slide the microSD card into the card socket until it is secured into place Important Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the device s contact pins Note MicroSD cards should be formatted within the Storage menu Using an older or slow microSD card can affect camera performance especially for video recording To remove the microSD Memory Card 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Remove the battery page 12 3 Carefully place your fingernail into the end of the micro SIM slot and begin to pull the card sl
66. charging the battery ii any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering or iii the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified What are SAMSUNG s obligations During the applicable warranty period provided the Product is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product at SAMSUNG s sole option without charge SAMSUNG may at SAMSUNG s sole option use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any Product or may replace the Product with a rebuilt reconditioned or new Product Repaired replaced cases pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety 90 days All other repaired replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the 340 remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety 90 days whichever is longer All replaced Products parts components boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG Except to any extent expressly allowed by applicable law transfer or assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited What must you do to obtain warranty service To obtain service under this Limited Warranty you must return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate container for shipping accompanied by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the original date of pur
67. connectivity to multiple devices Note You can not mount your device s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http www samsung com us support downloads Connections 223 To connect using USB Tethering 1 224 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt s T Mobile folder gt Mobile HotSpot sore From the Home screen press E and then tap Settings gt i Connections tab gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your device Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu This places a green check mark next to the entry and activates the feature A Tethering or HotSpot active notification briefly appears on the screen Look for the Tethering active icon A in the Status bar area of the screen Read the on screen notification regarding data use and tap OK To disconnect tethering 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt Ei T Mobile folder gt Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the check mark and deactivate the feature 3 Remove the USB cable from the device Mobile HotSpot This feature allows you to turn your device into a Wi Fi hotspot The feature works best when used in conjunction with 4G LTE data services although 3G service can also be used The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of thi
68. contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms of media while another screen might contain communication apps such as Gmail You can customize your Home screen by doing the following Adding Deleting and Rearranging screens Assigning a New Home screen Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts Sharing Application Information Managing Shortcuts Adding and Removing Widgets Changing the Background Wallpapers Adding and Deleting Screens Your phone comes with five default screens You can delete these screens and then add them back later Note These screens can be deleted and re arranged Important Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least one screen To delete a screen 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Edit page 2 Touch and hold then drag the undesired screen up to the Remove tab qup 3 Press GM to return to the main Home screen To add a screen 1 From the Home screen press i and then tap Edit page 2 Tap Add screen The newly added screen appears as the last page 3 Press WEB to return to the main Home screen Rearranging the Screens 1 From the Home screen press E and then tap Edit page 2 Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new location Upper left is screen position 1 and bottom right is screen last screen Assigning a New Home Screen 1 From the Home screen press i and then tap Edit page 2 Tap A The new Home screen the
69. control boxes receivers from several rooms You could go from controlling your set top box in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do the same 1 Sign into your Samsung account From the main WatchON screen tap the On TV tab Press and then select Settings gt Add room Name the new room and tap Next Enter your current zip code and tap Done This zip code must correspond to the location of your desired TV and set top box ga PON Follow the steps from page 216 to complete the process 220 YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt d YouTube 2 Tapthe search field to search for specific videos Scroll down to browse through the main page thumbnails or scroll to the bottom to explore additional options 3 To view a video tap an available preview thumbnail or tap the title link To configure YouTube Settings m Press and then tap Settings and configure the following parameters General High quality on mobile when enabled allows you to start all videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile network Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on screen captions Choose from Small Medium Large or Huge Uploads specifies network preferences for uploads Content localization allows you to prioritize channels and videos fro
70. create a new action memo via an available pop up screen Message During a call you can create a message Tap Message gt lt 4 Compose Address and create the message Review your message and tap EF Send One handed operation on off to enable or disable the resize and reposition the keypad dialer for either left off or right handed operation on Multi Party calls Making a Multi Party Call A multi party call is a network service that multiple people to participate in a multi party or conference call For further details about subscribing to this service contact T Mobile customer service Setting up a Multi Party Call 1 From the Home screen tap 3 2 Dial the number for the first participant and tap 3 Once connected tap Add call enter the second phone number and tap ES The first caller is placed on hold 4 Waitfor the second caller to answer the incoming call and tap Merge The two calls are now joined into a multi party call and display in the order in which they were called Important Multiple callers can be joined to a single multi party line Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session and are held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call You can swap or place each multi party call on hold Having a Private Conversation With One Participant Note The Manage conference call option is not available for multi party calls created while using the Wi Fi Calling f
71. current in home coverage experience Wi Fi Calling works anywhere there is a Wi Fi signal available Important A new micro SIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling Note This feature is active by default If you are in an active Wi Fi call and go out of range of your Wi Fi the call will be dropped Note To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi Fi calling when outside the United States the Data Roaming feature on your device must be turned off Note With certain rate plans minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes Important If you are not using a new ISIM card you will receive an Error ERxx Invalid SIM message You must be using a new ISIM card to use this feature Activating Wi Fi Calling 1 c d Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon PA the Status Bar e f prompted with an on screen Did you know your phone can make calls over Wi Fi popup tap Learn and follow the remaining on screen instructions Tap Next gt Done From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks Locate the Wi Fi Calling field and in a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on If Missing 911 Address displays in the Status Bar follow these steps to provide 911 an address for emergency situations e Log in
72. disposal of these items in household or business trash may be prohibited Help us protect the environment recycle Warning Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode UL Certified Travel Charger Display Touch Screen The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL Please note the following information when using your safety requirements Please adhere to the following safety mobile device instructions per UL guidelines WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY The display on your mobile device is made of glass or LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE acrylic and could break if your mobile device is PROPERTY DAMAGE dropped or if it receives significant impact Do not use IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause INSTRUCTIONS injury to you DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR WARRANTY DISCLAIMER PROPER USE OF A ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE TOUCH SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE INSTRUCTIONS If your mobile device has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH AMERICA USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET stylus Using excessive force or a metallic object when THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE pressing on the touch screen may dama
73. illustration shows the side elements of your device 1 Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in standby mode or adjust the voice volume during a call When receiving an incoming call Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone 2 Power End key emm ends a call or switches the phone off and on Press and hold for two seconds to access the Device options screen 24 Status Bar The Status Bar shows information about the connection status signal strength phone battery level and time and displays notifications about incoming messages calls and other actions This list identifies the icons you see on your phone s display Screen Indicator Icons This list identifies the symbols you ll see on your device s display and Indicator area Note Some Notification icons can be hidden manually by toggling the status of the Notification panel function For more information refer to Accessing Additional Screen Functions on page 33 Displays your current signal strength The greater Vil the number of bars the stronger the signal Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active You f cannot send or receive any calls or access online information y CECE PRO Indicates there is no signal available Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone Displays when there is a system error or alert Displays to indicate a security warning You are prompted to set a screen lock password Displays whe
74. in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for brain cancer If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer rates should go up because heavy cell phone use has been common for quite some time in the U S Between 1987 and 2005 the overall age adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase Additional information about SEER can be found at http seer cancer gov Health and Safety Information 317 Cell Phone Industry Actions Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number of steps including the following Support needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type of signal emitted by cell phones Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user and Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information on cell phone use and human health concerns The FDA also is working with voluntary standard setting bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE the International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP and others to assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect the public 318 Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy RF from cell phones and at this point we
75. in the Wi Fi list as connected Wi Fi Direct Setup and Settings To activate your connection You can configure your device to connect directly with other 1 Fromthe main Settings page tap Connections tab Wi Fi capable devices This is an easy way to transfer data 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the between devices These devices must be enabled for Wi Fi right to turn it on The slider color indicates the direct communication This connection is direct and not via a activation status HotSpot or WAP 3 Tap Wi Fi Direct cx Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and m Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin eS communicating the connection process to another Wi Fi Direct Note Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi Fi compatible device network connection 0r Tap Multi connect gt Scan and select all the device names to begin the connection process to these Wi Fi Direct compatible devices Note The target device must also have Wi Fi Direct service active and running before it can be detected by your device Changing Your Settings 235 5 Tap Done The direct connection is then established Confirm Q appears in the Status bar 6 When prompted to complete the connection the recipient should tap OK Your status field now reads Connected and your connected device is listed within the Wi Fi Direct devices listing Bluetooth settings About Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short
76. incoming call Outgoing call conditions configures the connected Bluetooth device to make outbound calls within one of two settings Even when device locked or Only when device unlocked Wi Fi Calling Allows you to both activate deactivate the Wi Fi Calling feature and configure its settings For more information referto Wi Fi Calling on page 252 Note If the Wi Fi Calling feature is active and connected the Call forwarding feature is greyed out and inaccessible Additional settings allows you to configure additional call Settings For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 277 Ringtones and keypad tones allows you to manage your device s ringtones and vibratory features Choose from Ringtones Vibrations Vibrate when ringing and Keypad tones used when the keypad is pressed Personalize call sound allows you to enable the personalize Call sound function within an active call You can adjust the audio by enabling selecting an audio preset Noise reduction allows you to enable suppression of background audio Increase volume in pocket enables the ringtone volume to be increased when the device is in a pocket or bag Voicemail service allows you to assign the service Voicemail settings displays the settings for the voicemail Sound assigns your default voicemail ringtone Vibrate enables vibration notification for incoming voicemails TT
77. it the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found i on the Product box ii on the Product information screen which can be found under Settings iii on a label on the back of the Product beneath the battery if the battery is removable and iv on the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable Alternatively you may opt out by calling 1 888 987 4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product and providing the same information These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty Severability If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or unenforceable such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty Precautions for Transfer and Disposal If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the standard methods the data only appears to be removed on a superficial level and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this sort it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung s Customer Care Center for
78. licenses App version displays the software version for the current YouTube application To watch a high quality video m Press I and then tap Settings gt General gt High quality on mobile Applications and Development 221 Section 9 Connections PC Connections You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data cable using various USB connection modes Media device MTP allows you to transfer media files in Windows or using an Android file transfer on a Mac Camera PTP allows you to transfer photos using the camera software and transfer any files onto a PC that does not support MTP Media device USB 3 0 allows you to transfer large media files much faster via an activated USB 3 0 connection page 223 Kies allows you to manage music movies and photos You can also backup precious contacts and calendars download apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device firmware Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your devices Note To sync your device to your computer it is highly recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is available at http www samsung com kies for Windows Mac 222 Note If you are a Windows XP user ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer Also ensure that you have Samsung Kies or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer Connecting as a Storage Device You can connect your device to a PC
79. or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features 1 From the Home screen tap RE Apps gt Ie Camera 2 Press and then tap Settings gt E Settings and scroll up to the Storage entry 3 Tapthis entry and select the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos Choose from Device or Memory card Note It is recommended that you set the option to Memory card 4 Press WEM to return to the Home screen Using the Camera Taking Photos Taking pictures with your device s built in camera is as simple as choosing a subject pointing the camera then pressing the camera key Note When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions shadows may appear on the photo 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt IC Camera 2 Using the device s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject 3 Before you take a picture use the Up and Down Volume keys to zoom in or out You can magnify the picture up to x4 400 percent Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to zoom in 4 If desired before taking the photo you can tap on screen icons to access various camera options and settings You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired area of interest Tap fo Camera until the shutter sounds The picture is automatically stored within your designated storage location pag
80. pages and locate a desired Widget Touch and hold an available Widget until it detaches from the screen While still holding the Widget scroll left or right across the available screens and let go of the Widget to place it on your current screen Understanding Your Device 37 To remove a Widget 1 Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the current screen Drag the widget over the Remove tab qub and release it As you place the Widget into the Trash both items turn red This action doesn t delete the Widget it just removes it from the Current screen To place a widget onto a different screen 1 38 Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the adjacent page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto the new page Drag the widget to its desired position on the new Screen Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other Screens Managing Wallpapers Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images user taken Live wallpapers animated backgrounds or Wallpaper gallery default phone wallpapers Note Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery power To change the current Home screen wallpaper 1 Navigate to any screen Press MB to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold an empty area of the screen 3 From the Home screen window tap Set wallpaper gt Home screen 4 Select a Wallpaper type
81. press and then tap Settings gt BEI Controls tab Air gesture allows you to control your device by performing motions above the sensor without touching the device Air view displays helpful information when you hover your finger over the screen Air command allows you to activate or deactivate the Air comand function that apears on screen once you remove the S Pen from its internal slot Motions allows you to control your device using natural movements on the screen Palm motion allows you to control your device by touching the Screen with your entire hand Smart screen allows you to control your device by using intelligent face detection features such as Smart stay Smart rotation Smart pause and Smart scroll e Increase touch sensitivity allows you to increase the screen s touch sensitivity For more information refer to Motions and Gestures Settings on page 290 Understanding Your Device 47 Using the Multi Window Activating and Deactivating Multi window This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the To activate Multi window via the Notification screen current screen at the same time 1 Ina single motion touch the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag it to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen 2 From the Notification screen tap EH Open Grid Note Only applications found within the Multi window panel can be active atop another cur
82. properly and you have completed programming your box press gt Back Applications and Development 217 Note This IR programming of your set top box is a one time process and once successful should not need to be repeated 9 If prompted to personalize your experience follow the on screen instructions Using WatchON To change channels 1 2 218 Sign into your Samsung account From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt Samsung folder gt WatchON e From the top of the main screen tap Remote Control This launches an on screen remote control Easy remote provides the most common used control features Scroll down to view additional functions In a single motion touch and drag up from the bottom right of the screen to access additional remote tabs Choose from one of the following TV provides access to control functions specific to your TV e Set top box displays customized control specific to your configured set top box Ex satellite dish remote control functions From the remote screen press eil and then tap Change room to choose from different receivers boxes in different rooms Ex Living Room box Bedroom box etc 6 Press gt Back to return to the main menu Locating your favorite programming Sign into your Samsung account 2 From the main WatchON screen tap Combined View to reveal available media categories Select an available category or Tap Channel
83. range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices such as headsets and hands free car kits and Bluetooth enabled handhelds computers printers and wireless devices The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt MEI Connections tab Connections 236 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status When active displays in the Status area To turn Bluetooth off 1 From the Home screen press 1 and then tap Settings 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off Note Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use Bluetooth Status Indicators The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance Displays when Bluetooth is active Displays when Bluetooth is connected paired and communicating Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the characteristics of your device s Bluetooth service including Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth communication and description Setting your device s visibility or discoverability for other Bluetooth devices Displaying your device s Bluetooth address To access the Bluetooth S
84. same screen Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be run at the same time as a current on screen app Once multiple apps are running on the same screen you can then choose to either swap their positions or maximize a desired app Note Only applications found within the Multi window panel can be active atop another current application on the Screen When launching applications that contain multimedia files music video audio from both files will be played simultaneously Note Multi window can now run two separate instances of the same application If there are any issues with activating Multi window confirm the setting is activated page 262 Ex Separate Messages within both the top and bottom split views 52 In this example we will be launching both the Internet and Maps applications 1 Launch an application From the Home screen tap Internet 2 Activate the Multi window feature 3 Tap the tab to display the apps panel 4 Touch and hold the desired app such as Maps until it detaches from the panel 5 Ina single motion drag it over the current app and drop the new Multi window app over either the top or bottom area of the current on screen app Apps gt Note Once two applications are running the device displays a split screen view containing both the initial app and the new Multi window app Each application is still independent of the other To switch the arrangement of th
85. screen 2mm and still interact with the display 1 SPen button by pressing the Pen button you can add functionality to the S Pen 2 Stylus tip the tip of the S Pen is used for tapping the Screen For more information refer to S Pen Settings on page 289 Understanding Your Device 41 Rich S Pen Functionality S Pen Input When the S Pen hovers over an input area selecting the E Handwriting Input provides an on screen Handwriting Area Air Button S Pen provides a fast experience in performance by showing a menu via the Air Button interaction for different applicable contents Air Command Once removed from its slot S Pen shows an on screen Air Command button toolbar that allows you to quickly activate frequently used applications or actions Action Memo Located within the Air Command toolbar allows you to quickly link short notes to applications like Phone Contacts Messages and so on Smart Clip Instantly outline and crop anything on the screen and freely edit or share with others via several applications Effectively express yourself Write Draw directly into an email or the calendar annotate Word Excel PowerPoint and PDF documents capture your ideas in S Note write a note on the back of the picture 42 Removing the S Pen from your Phone The S Pen is stored within your device to make it easier to keep track of To remove the S Pen m Use your fingernail or a sharp object t
86. screen context menu 4 Tap Remove Editing a Playlist Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist you can also share delete or rename the playlist Note Only those playlist you have created can be edited Default playlists can not be renamed 1 From within the Music application tap the Playlists tab 2 Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on screen context menu 3 Tap Edit title 4 Entera new name for this playlist and tap OK Transferring Music Files Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two methods 1 Downloaded to the device from the Play Store Music files are directly stored on your phone 2 Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card Applications and Development 183 Removing Music Files 1 From within the Music application tap the Songs tab 2 Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on screen context menu 3 Tap Delete gt OK The music file s is deleted My Files This application allows you to manage your sounds images videos bluetooth files Android files and other memory card data in one convenient location This application allows you to launch a file if the associated application is already on your phone ex MP4 m From the Home screen tap EEE Apps gt Samsung folder gt My Files Note Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders subfolders etc
87. select one of the account types 3 Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your credentials and set up the account 4 Agreencircle will appear next to the account type once you have created an account Your email account will also be displayed in the Accounts section of the main Settings menu Changing Your Settings 295 Removing an Account Important Removing an account also deletes all of its 296 messages contacts and other data from the device From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Accounts Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap the account name From the Accounts area of the screen tap the account entry Tap Remove account then tap Remove account at the prompt to remove the account and delete all its messages contacts and other data Synchronizing a Accounts By default all managed accounts are synchronized You can also manually sync all current accounts 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Accounts Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap the account name Tap the account name entry Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or tap Sync all to synchronize all your accounts Tap Cancel sync to stop the synchronization Tap Settings to access your account settings Creating a Samsung Account Just as important as setting up and activating a Google account to help provide access to Play Store etc
88. settings page tap Increase volume in pocket to create a check mark and enable the feature Voicemail You can view your voicemail number from this menu 1 From the main Call settings page tap Voicemail service 2 If an additional voicemail service is in use other than carrier tap Voice Mail to now view your selected voicemail number and information Note The Voicemail settings field is typically greyed out This field enables access to various voicemail settings Sound Voicemail Ringtone This option allows you to assign your default voicemail notification tone 1 From the main Call settings page tap Sound 2 Select a voicemail notification tone and tap OK Vibrate This option allows you to activate a vibration for an incoming voicemail m From the main Call settings page tap Vibrate field to toggle the feature on or off Changing Your Settings 281 TTY Mode A TTY also known as a TDD or Text Telephone is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf hard of hearing or who have speech or language disabilities to communicate by telephone Your device is compatible with select TTY devices Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible with digital cell phones Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs into your phone s headset jack If this cable was not provided with your TTY device contact your TTY device manufacturer to purc
89. slowly swipe it in the opposite direction over the screen Multimedia 139 Assigning an Image as a Contact Photo Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt PX 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt PX Gallery Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it 3 With the image displayed press i and then tap 3 With the image displayed press and then tap Setas Contact photo Set as 4 Tapa contact to make a selection 4 Select one of the these options 5 Use the on screen crop the image by dragging it Home screen assigns the current image to the home screen around or out from its corners background This image is spread across all available screens 6 Tap Done to store the new image Lock screen assigns the selected image to the background for the lock screen Home and lock screens assigns the current image to both the Home screen and Lock screens 5 Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out to create a cropped area 6 Tap Done to assign the wallpaper image zs Tap Cancel to stop without updating the wallpaper image 140 Editing a Photo You can edit your photos using the built in Photo editor application on your device The photo editor application provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on your phone Along
90. sound feature allows you to customize your call sounds 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Sound gt Adapt Sound 2 Readthe instructions and tap Start 3 Follow the on screen instructions to set up your personal call sound Display Settings From this menu you can control the display on the device as well as configure the display settings 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Device tab gt Display 2 Configure the following screen display settings Brightness allows you to configure the LCD Brightness levels Tap Automatic brightness to allow the device to self adjust and tap OK or Touch and slide the on screen slider to adjust the level and tap OK Screen timeout allows you to adjust the delay time before the screen automatically turns off Make an available selection Choices include 15 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes and 10 minutes Touch key light duration allows you to adjust the delay before the Touch key light automatically turns off Screen mode allows you to select from several different color modes Changing Your Settings 261 262 Reading mode allows you to activate an optimized reading mode for selected applications This menu allows you to assign available applications such as Calculator Camera Contacts etc for enhancement using the Reader mode e Auto adjust screen tone adjusts the phone s LCD brightness level to automati
91. tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi 2 Press l and then tap Advanced 3 Tap the Sort by field and select either Alphabet or RSSI Changing Your Settings 231 Keep Wi Fi on During Sleep By default when your device enter a sleep mode your Wi Fi connection stays on all the time If the feature is Never enabled during sleep that current data usage is taken over by your SIM and its network connection 1 232 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press and then tap Advanced gt Keep Wi Fi on during sleep Select an available option Always maintains your current active Wi Fi connection even during sleep Only when plugged in maintains the active Wi Fi connection only when the device detects it is connected to a power supply This reduced the drain on your device s battery Never increase data usage shuts off the current Wi Fi connection during sleep and diverts any current data usage to the cellular network connection Allow scanning Allows the Google location service and other apps to scan for networks even when Wi Fi is turned off 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press and then tap Advanced Tap the Always allow scanning field to activate or deactivate the feature Auto Network selection Allows the device to automatically switch between Wi Fi network or cellular network 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab
92. tap Controls tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Air gesture slider to the right to turn it on If the feature is available for your selected action an Air gesture icon d will appear in the status bar 3 Read the on screen notification and tap OK Note At least one feature must be activated before Air gesture can be activated 4 Tap Learn about sensor and icon field to review on screen information about the Air gestures sensor and related icon 5 Inasingle motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position The following is a description some of the most commonly used gestures Quick glance Once enabled you can move your hand over the air gesture sensor located above the on screen clock at the upper right to temporarily activate preview window that can be used to display selected user enabled information such as Time amp Date Notification icons Missed calls etc Air jump Once enabled you can move your hand over the air gesture sensor up or down and easily jump to either the top or bottom of a lengthy display page ex Internet or Email Air browse Once enabled you can move your hand over the air gesture sensor left or right and easily move to either the previous or next item in a series ex music tracks pictures or pages e Air call accept Once enabled you can simply wave your hand over the air gesture sensor to accept any incoming call Changing Your Settings 291 To
93. templates 3 Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current message conversation To create your own text template 1 From the Home screen tap wu 2 From the Messaging list press and then tap Text templates 3 Tap Create text template 4 Enter a new text string and tap Save Using Email Email or Internet Email enables you to review and create email using several email services You can also receive text message alerts when you receive an important email Your phone s Email application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts simultaneously in one convenient location There are currently three main types of email accounts on your phone Gmail Internet based email Gmail Yahoo etc and Microsoft Exchange Corporate email or Outlook To send and receive email messages through an ISP Internet Service Provider account or if you wish to use your device to access your corporate email through a VPN Virtual Private Network you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account Messages 111 IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol This protocol is frequently used in large networks and commercial settings IMAP4 is the current standard POP3 Post Office Protocol This protocol is supported by most ISPs Internet service providers and common among consumer applications POP3 is the current standard Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync This protocol is frequently used with a large cor
94. text such as names phone numbers and events from your Contacts Calendar or a Memo 1 2 While composing a message press gt Add text At the Add text screen select one of the following S Note allows you to insert text from an existing S Note Calendar allows you to add the name date and time of a calendar event to your message Location allows you to add an address and the link to the location on Google Maps Contacts allows you to add the name and phone number of any of your contacts to your message Text templates allows you to add pre defined phrases and sentences For more information refer to Text Templates on page 111 The information is added to your message Viewing Newly Received Messages When you receive a message your phone notifies you by displaying within the Notification area at the top left of your Home screen To read a message 1 Open the Notification Bar and select the message For more information refer to Notification Bar on page 33 or From the Home screen tap bad then tap the new message to view its contents The selected message displays on the screen 2 Tap to play a multimedia message e To pause playback of the multimedia message tap 3 In a single motion touch and drag up or down the page to scroll through the message if additional pages were added Message Threads Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into message threads
95. the Register Signature screen draw a signature or symbol within the drawing area Wait for the device to notify you that the signature was registered and tap Continue Repeat the process two more times to confirm the new signature or pattern Enter a backup PIN and tap Continue Repeat the process to re confirm the PIN Signature options 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Lock screen 2 Configure one of the following options Clock widget options allows you to show the dual clock on the lock screen adjust the Clock size and show the date Personal message allows you to enter a customized personalized message that is displayed on the lock screen Owner information allows you enter text to display on the lock Screen Make signature visible enables the visibi signature as you write it Accuracy level adjusts the accuracy level required when entering your signature Choose from High Medium or Low Lock automatically sets the timeframe in which the device will automatically lock after the screen turns o Lock instantly with power key allows you to either enable disable the function whereby the device instantly lock after pressing the power key Action Memo on lock screen allows you to open the Action Memo when double tapping the lock screen with S Pen ity of the on screen Setting an Unlock Pattern Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the phone When you enable the U
96. this service displays application information Setting Up Web Storage Web storage services allow you to use storage space to store your files and share them on the Cloud Note If you are using another Web storage service log into that service first before using Samsung Link 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt Samsung folder gt o Samsung Link Note When adding storage an N Drive is added 2 Tap Add storage and choose from SugarSync Dropbox or SkyDrive Press i and then tap Settings gt Registered storage gt Add storage 3 Follow the on screen instructions to register or log into your cloud service 4 Once the process is successfully completed the Web storage icon or name appears in the Web storage area of the main screen Applications and Development 205 5 From the main screen select a connected device and then tap on the media that you would like to share e A file with N in the upper left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web storage location Selecting this media causes your device to access the file currently stored on your services Servers To de register Web storage service 1 From the Samsung Link application press e and then tap Settings gt Registered storage 2 Select Delete gt Delete 3 Select a current storage service and tap OK 206 Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target Device Important Make sure all communicating devices
97. username and password which might pose a security risk if not properly managed You can clear these cookies from your device at any time 1 From an active Web page press and then tap Settings gt Privacy Delete personal data 2 Tap Cookies and site data to create a checkmark 3 Tap Done Using Web History The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed websites These entries can be used to return to previously unmarked web pages 1 From the webpage tap History 2 Select a visited range category Choose from Today Last 7 days or Most visited 3 Tapan entry to display the webpage or Press and then tap Clear history to delete the current History list Applications and Development 173 Browser Settings Remember form data Allows the device to store data from To configure browser settings any previously filled out forms Remove the checkmark to 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt disable this function Samsung folder gt Internet Remember passwords Stores usernames and passwords for 2 Press and then tap Settings visited sites Remove the checkmark to disable this function 3 Ch tion from the followi T Delete personal data allows you to delete all personal data aa e a A A a SS such as Browsing history Cache Cookies and site data Basics Passwords Auto fill data and Location access Account Allows you to log into your Samsung account Screen and text Set
98. when unanswered automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not answered and otherwise allows you to enter a voicemail number 278 Forward when unreachable automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not in service or is turned off Using Auto Area Code This feature prepends an area code to all outbound calls When enabled the designated prefix is always added before your dialed numbers Ex If you were using 999 as your area code 555 5555 would be dialed as 999 555 5555 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings 2 Tap Auto area code enter a new prefix and then tap OK Call Barring Configures the device to barr prevent selected outbound calls 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings 2 Tap Call barring and select from the available settings Choose from All outgoing calls International calls Intl calls except home All incoming calls or Incoming when roaming Call Waiting 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings 2 Tap Call waiting to enable disable the on screen notification of new incoming call during an active call Auto Redial 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings 2 Tap Auto redial to automatically enable disable the feature whereby the device redials the dialed number if it is unable to connect or the call is cut off Fixed Dialing Numbers Fixed Dial Number FDN
99. your calculation by tapping the Plus Minus Multiplication or Division key Enter the next number 5 To view the result tap the equals key Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required Note Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional scientific functions 150 Calendar With this feature you can consult the calendar by day week or month create events and set an alarm to act as a reminder Google Calendar is built into the phone and synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone and your online Google account Important You should previously add an account Facebook Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Google prior to using the Calendar 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt oT Calendar The following tabs are available on the right side of the display Year displays the Year view Month displays the Month view Week displays the Week view Day displays the Day view e List displays the events in a List view Task allows you to search for tasks 2 Tap Create event to create a new Calendar event or Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a blue box then press and select one of the following options Go to displays a specific date Delete allows you to delete All events All events before today or an individual event Search allows you to search within your current events Sync allows you to synchronize and update your current
100. your phone A robust index for features begins on page 352 Also included is important safety information that you should know before using your device This information is available near the back of the guide beginning on page 315 This manual provides navigation instructions according to the default display settings If you select other settings navigation may be different Unless otherwise specified all instructions in this manual assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the available keys Note Instructions in this manual are based on default settings and may vary from your device depending on the software version on your device and any changes to the device s Settings Unless stated otherwise instructions in this User Manual start with the device unlocked at the Home screen All screen images in this manual are simulated Actual displays may vary depending on the software version of your device and any changes to the device s Settings Getting Started 7 Special Text Throughout this manual you ll find text that is set apart from the rest These are intended to point out important information share quick methods for activating features to define terms and more The definitions for these methods are as follows Notes Presents alternative options for the current feature menu or sub menu Tips Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts Important Points out impor
101. 07 Settings 174 Bubble Options 104 Sharing 104 Burst Shots 124 Business Cards Creating 84 C Calculator Scientific Functions 150 Calendar Creating An Event 151 Handwriting Mode 151 Settings 152 Call Accessories 274 Settings 59 60 273 Call Alert Call Vibrations 274 276 Call Alerts 274 Call Answering Ending 274 Call Barring 277 279 Call Duration 72 Resetting Times 72 Call Forwarding 275 Configuring 278 Call Functions 56 Answering 60 Answering w Gestures 60 Background Calling 57 Ending 57 Ending a Call 57 Ending via Status Bar 57 Making a Multi Party Call 67 Pause Dialing 62 Redialing the last number 63 Vibrate 275 Wait Dialing 62 Call Rejection 60 273 Call Settings 273 Additional Settings 277 General 273 Call Sound Personalize 65 Call Status Tones 274 Call Vibration 274 276 Call Waiting 68 278 279 Caller ID 277 Calling Using Wi Fi 252 Calls Auto Reject 273 Making a 56 Multi party 67 Camcorder 131 Accessing the Video Folder 133 Settings 128 Shooting Video 131 Camera 122 Camera Options 124 Enabling Share Shot 135 Quick Settings 126 Settings 128 Taking Pictures 123 Care and Maintenance 329 Certificates Install 233 Charging battery 13 ChatON 153 Adding a Buddy 154 Adding New Buddy 154 Buddy photo share 130 Chatting On 155 Deleting Bubble 155 Register Service 154 Children and Cell Phones 319 Chrome Google 155 Clearing Application cache and data 193 Cloud 298 CMAS 108 Collect Diagnostics
102. 13 YouTube 220 Applications and Development 145 Apps Adding 32 Reset Preferences 307 Apps Screen Customizing 145 Area Code Auto Assign 277 Audio Output Mode 304 Audio Output 261 Auto Redial 278 279 Auto Reject Configuration 61 Auto Reject List 273 Auto Reject Mode 273 Automatic Answering 274 Automatic Restore 299 B Back up My Account 299 My Data 299 Backup and Restore 299 Battery Charging 13 Display Percentage 15 Extending Life 15 Installing 12 Low Battery Indicator 15 Removal 12 Show Display Percentage 262 Wall Charger 13 Battery Cover Removal 9 Replace 12 Battery Life Extending 15 Battery Usage 307 Battery Use amp Safety 324 Bigger Font Setting 272 Blocking Mode 282 On 282 Bloomberg 149 Bluetooth 236 About 236 353 Changing Name 237 Configure Device Settings 240 Deleting a Paired Device 240 Device Name 17 Disconnecting a Paired Device 240 Media Audio 240 Microphone Function 240 Off 236 On 236 Outgoing Headset Condition 274 277 Paring Devices 239 Review Downloaded Files 238 Scanning for other Devices 238 Sending Contact Information 241 Sending Contacts Via 241 Settings 237 Status indicators 236 Turning on and off 236 Visibility 238 Visible Time Out 238 Bookmarks Backing Up 301 354 Brightness Adjusting 261 Browser Adding bookmarks 172 Deleting bookmarks 173 Emptying cookies 173 Entering a URL 170 Navigation 168 Options 169 Resetting Default Actions 3
103. 255 S Beam This feature when activated via NFC allows you to beam large files directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact These files can be larger such as Videos HD pictures and other large files You can beam images and videos from your gallery music files from your music player and more 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab 2 Verify the NFC feature is active 3 Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on 4 If not already active in a single motion touch and slide the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on 5 Complete the transfer process between the two NFC enabled devices by placing them back to back This feature can come in very handy to quickly share pictures between users with compatible S Beam devices For more information refer to Using S Beam to Share Pictures on page 137 256 Nearby Devices This option allows you to share your media files with nearby devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi Fi 1 Connect to a Wi Fi network For more information refer to Connecting to a Wi Fi Network on page 230 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Nearby devices Tap the Nearby devices field to turn File sharing on A green check mark indicates the feature is active Once active J Nearby devices appears at the top of the screen 4 Atthe Nearby devices prompt tap OK Tap Shared contents then check the media you would like to share T
104. 72 Network Mode 2G Network 249 250 LTE 249 WCDMA GSM 249 New applications Downloading 191 NFC Near Field Communication 255 Non Market Applications 193 Notification Vibration Setting 258 Notification Bar 33 Using 33 Notification Panel Customizing Quick Access 270 Notifications Volume 258 0 Omni Button My Magazine 186 On Off Switch 16 One Handed Operation 290 On Off 59 66 Operating Environment 333 Organizer Calculator 150 World Clock 157 Other Important Safety Information 337 Out of Office Message 119 Settings 119 Outlook 111 Overview Home Screen 30 P Paired Windows Multi Window Preset 54 Palm Motion Activate 294 Capture Screen 294 Mute Pause 294 On 139 294 Passpoint On 231 Passwords Make Visible 311 Pause Dialing 62 Pen Window 46 Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN 322 Phone Icons 24 Switching on off 16 Phone number Finding 56 Phone Ringtone 259 Phone Vibration 259 Photo Editing 141 Photos Change Player 130 Options 130 131 133 Sharing 130 131 133 Picture Color Correction 142 Face Corrections 142 Frame 142 Set As 140 Streaming from Gallery 139 Picture In Picture 212 Pictures Instant Sharing 135 Sharing 134 137 Pinning Memo 148 Play Books 187 Play Store 191 Pointer Speed Configuration 288 Power Auto Adjust Screen Tone 262 Power Saving CPU Power 308 Haptic Feedback 308 LCD Adjustment 262 363 Learning About 308 Screen Power 308 Power Saving Mo
105. 84 Settings 283 Sounds 260 Symbol Numeric Mode 78 Samsung Link Configuring Settings 204 Definitions 203 Deregister Storage 206 Sharing Media 206 Web Storage Setup 205 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 325 Save a Number From Keypad 82 Scrapbook 207 Copy Using S Pen 45 Using S Pen 45 Screen Home 30 Navigation 40 Screen Capture 294 Taking a Screen Shot 139 Screen Lock Pen Attach Detach 260 Set Up 265 Sounds 260 Screen Lock Pattern Changing 266 Creating 265 Deleting 266 Forgot My Pattern 267 Screen Mirroring Activate on Device 144 Activation 257 On 144 257 Using AllShare Cast Hub 144 Screen Rotation Auto Rotate 262 Screen Shots Selective 45 Screen Timeout 261 Screen Unlock Signature 264 Swipe 264 Screen Write Using S Pen 46 Screens Adding and Deleting 35 Customizing 34 Rearranging 35 SD card Mounting the 309 Unmounting 309 Security Auto Update 312 365 Sending a Namecard 89 Sensitivity Increase Touch Sensitivity 47 291 295 Setting an alarm 156 Setting up Voicemail 17 Settings 128 228 Accessing 228 Browser 174 Call 59 Contact list 93 Enabling the GPS Satellites 247 Enabling Wireless Locations 247 Messaging 106 Tab Overview 228 Wallpaper 39 Setup Initial 16 Severe Alert Disable 109 Share Shot 135 Activate 127 Configuring 136 366 Enabling 136 Stop Sharing 136 Taking Images 136 Share Videos 166 Shortcuts Adding from Application Screen 36 Adding from Home Screen 36 Delet
106. 90 Voice 800 222 2336 Email info audiology org Internet http www audiology org Pages default aspx 332 National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive MSC 2320 Bethesda MD 20892 2320 Email nidcdinfo nih gov Internet http www nidcd nih gov National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH 395 E Street S W Suite 9200 Patriots Plaza Building Washington DC 20201 Voice 1 800 35 NIOSH 1 800 356 4674 1 800 CDC INFO 1 800 232 4636 Outside the U S 513 533 8328 Email cdcinfo cdc gov Internet http www cdc gov niosh topics noise default html 1 888 232 6348 TTY Operating Environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use it or when it may cause interference or danger When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another device read its user s guide for detailed safety instructions Do not connect incompatible products Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency RF signals However certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives Implantable Medical Devices A minimum separation of six 6 inches should be mai
107. Apps gt E T Mobile folder gt Mobile HotSpot 2 Activate the desired connection method For more information see either USB Tethering on page 223 or Mobile HotSpot on page 225 Music The Music Player is an application that can play music files The music player supports files with extensions AAC AAC eAAC MP3 WMA 3GP MP4 and M4A Launching the Music Player allows you to navigate through your music library play songs and create playlists music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed Playing Music 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt Music 2 Tap a library category tab to select the music category Songs Playlists Albums Artists or Folders 3 Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback Note The 5 1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is connected through the headset jack only 4 Use any of the following Music player controls o Pause the song g Start the song after pausing Applications and Development 179 IIESESE ESERS 3ESEAEA EJ EI 180 Press and hold to rewind the song Tap to go to previous song Press and hold to fast forward the song Tap to go to next song Volume control and SoundAlive Volume control showing volume muted Plays the entire song list once Replays the current list when the list ends Repeats the currently playing song Shuffles the current list of songs randomly Songs play in order and are not shuffled Lists
108. Backing Up to PC 300 Memory Card Erasing Files 309 Merge Calls 67 Merge with Google 84 Message Options 99 Read 103 Register a Number as Spam 104 Reply 103 155 Thread Options 104 Threads 103 Message Search 105 Message threads 103 Messaging Adding a Signature 106 Adding Attachments 98 Additional Text 102 Block Unknown Senders 108 110 Creating and sending 98 Creating and Sending Text Messages 98 Current Message Options 101 Deleting a message 105 Draft 100 Google Mail 162 Icons on the Status Bar 97 Insert Smiley 101 Locked 100 Menu Options 99 Options 99 Scheduled Messages 100 Settings 106 Signature 106 Spam 100 Text Templates 111 Translate Text 102 Types of Messages 97 Viewing new 103 Messenger 178 micro SIM Card 9 Changing Existing PIN 310 Importing and Exporting 93 Insertion 9 Lock 310 Removal 10 Setting Up Lock 310 microSD Card Insertion 11 Removal 11 Microsoft Exchange 80 111 Mobile Data Activate Deactivate 246 Set Data Limit 246 Usage 248 Mobile HotSpot 225 241 Activating 225 242 Allowed Devices 227 243 Changing Password 226 243 Connecting 226 242 MAC Filtering 227 243 Transmit Power Mode 244 Mobile HotSpots Detect and Connect 247 Mobile Networks 248 Data Roaming 248 Mobile Data 248 Mobile Web 168 Entering Text in the Mobile Web Browser 170 Navigating with the Mobile Web 168 Using Bookmarks 171 Mono Audio Setup 272 Motion Activate 293 Air Command 293 Air View 292 Browse Image 294
109. C displays featured Music content available for purchase stream from the Music store amp Radio This page also allows you to search for new content or navigate directly to the Music store page by clicking on the Music link at the top of the page VIDEO displays featured film and TV content available for purchase rent from the video store This page also allows you to search for new content or navigate directly to the Movie amp TV store page by clicking the Video link a the top of the page Game store This page also allows you to search for new content or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking the Games link a the top of the page To purchase or view featured content in more detail tap on any content Thumbnail or text to navigate to the product detail page Depending on the content you can either purchase rent or stream the content directly from the product detail page Choose a payment method then follow the on screen instructions Applications and Development 201 Samsung Hub Notices Any media item Media Content may be rented or purchased after you create an account in Samsung Hub Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up to five 5 devices with Samsung Hub or the Service that are also registered to the same account You may remove a device from your account no more than once every 90 days You may remove Media Content from a d
110. Calendar allows you to add an event from your calendar Location allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your location Contacts allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry then add it to your message by tapping Done Review your message and tap BA Send If you have more than one recipient the same text message is sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients field Note If you exit a message before you send it it will be automatically saved as a draft Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap B Contacts Locate an entry from the Contacts list In a single motion touch and drag your finger over the number by going to the left This action addresses a new text message to the selected recipient Message Options Options before composing a message 1 2 From the Home screen tap Messages Before composing a message from the main Message screen press from the main Messaging screen to display additional messaging options Search allows you to search through all of your messages for a certain word or string of words Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then tap For more information refer to Message Search on page 105 Messages 99 Delete threads allows you to delete any message thread Select the messages to delete and a green check mark will appear next to the message T
111. Choose from Tiny Extra small Small Medium Large Extra Large or Huge Enable Magnification gestures to use exaggerated gestures such as triple tapping double pinching and dragging two fingers across the screen Tap the Negative colors field to reverse the display of on screen colors from White text on a Black background to Black text on a White background 272 14 15 16 17 18 19 Select Color adjustment to allow you to adjust the display colors if you are color blind and have difficulty reading the display because of the colors Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on Follow the on screen instructions Select Notification reminder to allow the device to play a beep when you have unread notifications Tap Accessibility shortcut to allow you to quickly enable accessibility features in 2 quick steps Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on Follow the on screen instructions Tap the Text to speech options field to configure the text to speech configuration parameters Use the Sound balance field to allow you to use the slider to set the Left and Right balance when using a Stereo device Tap the Mono audio field to enable stereo audio to be compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a single earbud earphone 20 21 22 23 24 25 Tap the Turn off all sounds field to mute every sound made by the device during taps selections notifications etc
112. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap ea Samsung Hub 3 When prompted to connect via mobile networks select either Cancel or Connect 4 If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or verified tap OK You must be signed in to your Samsung account to use the application s various features Apps gt Tip In some cases it might be necessary to sign in to your Samsung account via the application Press and then select Sign in Note Your Samsung Hub account is managed by the Samsung account application This application manages your user profile information BOOKS displays featured Book content available for purchase from the Book store This page also allows you to search for new content or navigate directly to the Book store page by clicking the Books link a the top of the page GAMES displays featured Game content available from the Using Samsung Hub The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all the available categories on one page such as Music Video Books and Games The overview page also displays recently added media that you can rent or purchase 1 From the Home screen tap HA Apps gt e6 Samsung Hub The OVERVIEW screen landing page displays an main access for all available categories and recently available content for purchase or rental Scroll across the screen to select from the following available pages MUSI
113. Direct Call 293 High Touch Sensitivity 295 Mute Pause 294 On 293 Overview 47 Settings 290 Smart Alert 293 Smart Screen 295 Zoom 293 Mounting the SD card 309 Multi Window Activate Deactivate 48 Activating 262 Activation 262 Close App 53 Custom Preset 54 Customizing 50 Enabling Two Applications 53 Increase App Window Size 53 Panel Relocation 50 Rearrange Apps 50 Removing Apps 51 Restoring Apps 51 Running Multiple Apps 52 Switch Arrangement 53 361 Tab Repositioning 49 Tiling Windows 53 Using 48 Multi Party Call 67 Dropping One Participant 68 Private conversation 67 Multi party call Setting up 67 Multi party calls 67 Multi Tasking Background Calling 57 Watching Videos 212 Music 179 Adding Music 182 Creating a Playlist 182 Editing a Playlist 183 Making a Song a Ringtone 180 Options 181 Playing Music 179 Removing Music 183 184 Share via Group Play 167 Simultaneoulsy Playback 167 Using Playlists 182 Volume 258 362 Music App Music Application 189 Now Playing Screen 190 Playing 190 Searching for Music 189 Tab Options 189 Music File Extensions 3GP 179 AAC 179 AAC 179 eAAC 179 M4A 179 MP3 179 MP4 179 WMA 179 Music Files Removing 184 Transferring 183 My Magazine 21 185 Changing Received Content 186 Navigation 186 Omni Button 186 My Places 177 248 Namecard Sending 89 Sending All 89 Share Via 89 Navigating Application Menus 54 Sub Menus 55 Through Screens 40 Negative Colors 2
114. ENTIAL DAMAGES S0 THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE AS TO THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products No agent employee dealer representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or claims whether in advertising presentations or otherwise on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state Warranty Information 341 What is the procedure for resolving disputes ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE CONDIT
115. FORMATION WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING THE SOFTWARE OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG 11 THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS Certain third party applications may be included with or downloaded to this mobile device Samsung makes no representations whatsoever about any of these applications Since Samsung has no control over such applications you acknowledge and agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for any content advertising products services or other materials on or available from such applications You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with you It is up to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use is free of such items as viruses worms Trojan horses and other items of a destructive nature References on this mobile device to any names marks products or services of any third parties are provided solely as a convenience to you and do not constitute or imply an endorsement sponsorship or recommendation of or affiliation with the third party or its products and services You agree that Samsung shall not be Warranty Information 347 responsible or liable directl
116. Gallery Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video playback Tap gt Play to begin video playback or Apps 3 Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to select the video selection indicated on screen and display the following video menu context options Share via E allows you to share the video via ChatON Add to Dropbox Bluetooth Email Evernote Create Note Gmail Google Messages Picasa S Note Scrapbook Wi Fi Direct or YouTube Delete T allows you to delete the current video Choose either OK or Cancel or Touch and hold a listed video file to place a checkmark alongside and then press for additional options Slideshow allows you to see your files in a slideshow or access the slideshow settings Copy allows you to create a duplicate of the currently selected file Move allows you to move a selected file to a new location Create video clip allows you to edit the current video apply effects and create a new video Create video clips from your pictures Select pictures from your album select create video clip choose one of the themes and save Hide items allows you to hide selected items Show hidden items allows you to show selected items that were previously hidden Rename allows you to rename the filename of the currently Selected video Details displays video file information or With the video displ
117. ION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other person s or entity s Product or claim and specifically without limitation of the foregoing shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator whose award may not exceed in form or amount the relief allowed by the applicable law The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act The laws of the State of Texas without reference to its choice of laws principles shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty 342 For any arbitration in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees are 5 000 00 or less Small Claim the arbitrator may if you prevail award your reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs as part of any award but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees expert witness fees or costs unless it is d
118. LITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY YOUR CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE SUCH AS CUSTOM OS SAFE Samsung Approved For Enterprise SAFE SAFETV Samsung for Enterprise is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung s own internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security related solutions for MDM and VPN The testing includes field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device During the testing the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as described by the third party security solution providers The testing for example includes field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device For more information about Samsung s SAFE program please refer to www samsung com us safe Disclaimer of Warranties EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY TO THE FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO LTD SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA LLC AND THEIR AFFILIATES COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES EXPRESS
119. LY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE INTEROPERABILITY OR NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION SAFE DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE DEVICES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION SAFE DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE DEVICES In addition information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with among other things the e mail platform master data management and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider solution provider or user Choice of an e mail master data management and virtual private network solution is at the sole discretion of the software provider solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider solution provider or user For complete statement of limited warranty please refer to www samsung com us safe available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab devices are sold 101212 Samsung Telecommunications America STA LLC Headquarters 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson TX 75082 Customer Care Center 1000 Klein R
120. Last name and Name suffix e Tap to remove a previously entered phone number 5 Tapthe image icon and select a photo for this contact Selections are Image Pictures by people Take picture or S Note Contacts 81 Enter additional information such as Email Groups Ringtone Message alert Vibration pattern or tap Add another field to input additional category information Add another field contains the following options Phonetic name Organization IM Address Notes Nickname Website Internet call Events or Relationship Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry To save a Number from your Keypad 1 82 oa Bn Keypad From the Home screen tap gt Keypad tab Enter a phone number Tap Add to contacts gt Create contact or Tap Add to contacts gt Update existing and select a Contact Enter additional contact information For more information refer to Creating a Contact on page 80 Finding a Contact You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto either your SIM card your phone s built in memory or an external location such as Google Exchange etc They are all physically separate but are used as a single entity called Contacts Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card the maximum number of phone
121. Pen button From the Air Command menu select rd Screen Write The current on screen elements are shot and then displayed as an editable image Tap to open the Pen settings menu and adjust the pen color and thickness Begin to write on the image and tap Save to store the new image Note Results are stored in the My Files gt All gt Device 46 storage gt Pictures gt Screenshots S Pen Using S Finder 1 2 3 Remove the S Pen from its slot Hover over the screen and press the S Pen button From the Air Command menu select Q S Finder and use the on screen search tools S Pen Using Pen Window This feature allows you to draw an on screen window and then populate the drawn area a target application 1 2 3 Remove the S Pen from its slot Hover over the screen and press the S Pen button Window Locate an on screen area and use the S Pen to draw out a rectangular shaped window Select an available application The desired app then appears within the drawn area Pen window Using Motions and Gestures By activating the various motion and gesture features within this menu page 290 you can access a variety of time saving functions Caution Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause unintended results To learn how to properly control motions tap HE Apps gt Settings gt Controls tab When tapped each entry comes with an on screen tutorial m From the Home screen
122. SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Ringtones and keypad tones 1 From the main Call settings page tap Ringtones and keypad tones Tap Ringtones select a ringtone and tap OK Tap Add to locate an audio file to create as a ringtone Tap Vibrations select a vibration type and tap OK Tap Create to begin creating your own custom vibration Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a check mark if you want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming Tap Keypad tones to create a check mark if you want tones to play when the keypad is pressed Personalize call sound This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear during a call with and without earphones m From the main Call settings page tap Personalize call sound and activate the feature by selecting an available option For more information refer to Personalizing the Call Sound Setting on page 65 Noise reduction This option allows you to suppress background noise during a call m From the main Call settings page tap Noise reduction to create a check mark and enable the feature Increase volume in pocket This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is in a pocket or a bag It uses the proximity sensor to detect its location m From the main Call
123. Samsung GALAXY Note available at T Mobile 4G LTE SMARTPHONE User Manual Please read this manual before operating your phone and keep it for future reference uL Warning This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive toxicity Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property as defined below owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone including but not limited to accessories parts or software relating there to the Phone System is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws state laws and international treaty provisions Intellectual Property includes but is not limited to inventions patentable or unpatentable patents trade secrets copyrights software computer programs and related documentation and other works of authorship You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property Moreover you agree that you will not and will not attempt to modify prepare derivative works of reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers Open Source Software Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GN
124. Settings page tap General tab gt Storage 2 Tap Mount SD card Unmounting the SD card Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the SD card while removing it from the slot 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Storage 2 Tap Unmount SD card gt OK 3 After the SD card will be unmounted message displays and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list remove the SD card Erasing Files from the SD card To erase files from the SD card using the device 1 Ensure the SD card is mounted 2 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Storage gt Mount SD card 3 Tap Format SD card Format SD card Delete all to format the SD card The SD card formats and erases all the data stored on it Changing Your Settings 309 Security The Security settings allow you to determine the security level for your device Encrypt Device When enabled this feature requires a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your device each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD card each time it is connected 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Security 2 Tap Encrypt device For more information read the displayed help screen 3 Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption on SD card data that requires a password be entered each time the microSD card is connected Tip Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent Encryption may t
125. Smart volume when activated automatically adjusts each track s volume to an equal level Voice control when activated allows you to use voice control commands to control the music player 182 Using Playlists Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this device or using a third party application such as Windows Media Player and downloading those files to an SD card inserted into the device Creating a Playlist 1 2 3 From within the Music application tap the Playlists tab Press and then tap Create playlist Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new name for this playlist then tap OK Tap Add music make on screen selections and tap Done Adding Music to a Playlist 1 2 3 From within the Music application tap the Playlists tab Tap the playlist name in which to add music Tap Add music This option is available within user created playlists Note If a playlist is empty add a song by touching a holding a song name from the main screen to open the context menu Select Add to playlist and choose the playlist 4 Tapamusic file or tap Select all to add all the music tracks to this playlist then tap Done Removing Music from a Playlist 1 From within the Music application tap the Playlists tab 2 Tap the playlist name in which to delete music 3 Touch and hold a song to reveal the on
126. Tethering and Mobile HotSpot gt Mobile HotSpot 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Mobile HotSpot slider to the right to turn it on 3 Edit the Network SSID name and then write it down 4 Enable the Broadcast network name SSID field if you would like to broadcast your SSID name to nearby devices 5 Verify the Security field is set to WPA2 PSK 6 Enter a new password then write it down Additional options include Show password and Show advanced options 7 Tap Save to store the new settings 8 Confirm the Mobile HotSpot active icon at the top of the screen appears 242 Note Using your Mobile HotSpot drains your device s battery much faster The best way to keep using the device as a HotSpot is by connecting to a Charger To connect to the HotSpot 1 Enable Wi Fi wireless functionality on your target device laptop media device etc Scan for Wi Fi networks from the external device and select your device s Mobile HotSpot name from the network list The SSID name for your device s hotspot is determined by what you entered into the Network SSID field You can change the name by tapping Configure Network SSID and changing the entry Select this HotSpot and follow your on screen instructions to complete the connection Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet connection To change the Portable HotSpot password 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt gi T Mo
127. Third Party Applications 305 Uninstalling 193 Time Zone Selecting 304 Timer Automatic Answering 274 277 Tools Camera 123 TrackPad Configure 288 Transferring Large Files 137 256 Transferring Music Files 183 Translate 102 Translate Message Bubble 105 Transmit Power Mode 244 Travel Wallpaper Lock Screen 39 TTS 287 TTY Mode 282 Twitter Predictive Text 285 U UL Certified Travel Charger 327 Understanding Your Device 19 Back View 23 Features 19 Front View 21 Home 30 367 S Pen 41 Side Views 24 Uninstalling Third party applications 193 Unknown Numbers Blocking Messages 110 Unknown Sources 193 Unlock Using a Signature 264 Unmounting SD card 309 Usage Battery 307 USB 2 0 Cable Installation 14 USB 3 0 19 26 Cable Installation 13 Enabling Connection 223 Reverting to USB2 0 223 USB Connections As Storage Device 222 USB Settings As Storage Device 222 368 USB Tethering 223 244 Activating 224 245 Use GPS Satellites 177 247 Use Wireless Networks 177 247 Using Favorites Adding Favorites 172 V Vibrate 275 Activate Deactivate for Voicemail 281 Vibration Create 280 Device 259 Intensity Setup 258 Video Picture In Picture 212 Sharing Videos 211 Volume 258 Videos Options 131 Voice Control 288 Voice Input Recognition 287 Voice Search 215 287 Voice Typing 73 Configuring 286 Using 74 Voicemail 281 Accessing 18 Setting up 17 Volume Settings Adjusting 258 VPN Adding 251 Setting
128. U General Public License GPL GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL OpenSSL License BSD License and other open source licenses To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses please visit http opensource samsung com Disclaimer of Warranties Exclusion of Liability EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT THE PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT AS IS AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR SM N900T UM English PS MI7 121613 F6 ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE THE DESIGN CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW RULE SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN ADDITION SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY INCLUDING INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS Modification of Software SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBI
129. Voicemail service Call Eu to call the entered number Delete to delete digits from the current number To view additional dialing options m After entering a number tap IE Send message to send the current caller a text message while still maintaining the current call active Add to contacts to add the current number to either a new or existing Contacts entry Speed dial setting to access the Speed dialing setting menu where you can assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry Add 2 sec pause to insert a two second pause to enter a 2 second delay within a number string the phone continues dialing after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed Tip You can create pauses longer than two seconds by entering multiple 2 second pauses Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string the phone waits for your input A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be manually sent by tapping Yes One handed operation on off to enable or disable the resize and reposition the keypad dialer for either left off or right handed operation on Call settings to provide you access to the Call settings screen Call Functions and Contacts List 59 Answering a Call When somebody calls you the phone rings and displays the incoming call image The caller s phone number picture or name if stored in Contacts List displays Touch and drag upward to reject with a message To
130. Y mode allows you to configure the TTY settings For more information refer to TTY Mode on page 282 Hearing Aids allows you to enable disable hearing aid compatibility For more information refer to HAC Mode on page 282 Call rejection 1 From the main Call settings page tap Call rejection gt Auto reject mode and tap one of the following options e All numbers to reject all calls Auto reject numbers to reject all calls in your Reject list Tap Auto reject list Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list Tap Unknown to create a check mark and automatically reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list Changing Your Settings 275 Set reject messages 1 From the main Call settings page tap Set up call rejection messages 2 Tap to manually add a reject message or Tap one of the pre written messages to be displayed when you want the call to be rejected You can edit the message if desired 3 Tap Save to save the reject message Answeringlending calls 1 From the main Call settings page tap Answering ending calls 2 Select any of the following options The home key answers calls allows you to press GI to answer the phone Voice control allows you to answer incoming voice calls using voice The power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the current call 276 Turn off screen during calls This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that your pho
131. a check mark alongside all currently displayed Contact entries 4 Tap Done and select a delivery method Bluetooth to transmit the contacts to another Bluetooth compatible device ChatON to send the contacts to selected buddies Email to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing email Exchange or Internet Evernote Create Note to send the contacts via the Evernote application Gmail to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing Internet based email Messages to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing text message Wi Fi Direct to transmit the entries to another Wi Fi Direct enabled device Contacts 89 Copying Contact Information Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts list is your phone s built in memory This procedure allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone s memory onto the SIM card 1 2 90 From the Home screen tap gt 5 From the Contacts List press E and then tap Import Export gt Export to SIM card Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries or Select a specific entry by touching an entry A check mark indicates a selection Tap Done The name and phone number for the selected contact is then copied to the SIM Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the phone s memory onto the SD card 1 2
132. ackground data restrictions 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Applications manager 2 Tapthe ALL tab to display all available applications 3 Press and then tap Reset app preferences gt Reset apps Important As an example if you assigned your browser to always launch YouTube links and want that changed you must reset the default actions Battery Usage This option allows you to view a list of those components using battery power The amount of time the battery was used also displays Battery usage displays in percentages per application 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Battery The battery level displays in percentage 2 From the upper right tap Refresh to update the list or Tap an entry to view more detailed information Note Other applications may be running that affect battery use Changing Your Settings 307 Power Saving Mode This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to use a power saving mode and configure additional power saving options manually all in an effort to conserve battery power 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Power saving mode 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on 3 Tap the following options to create a check mark and conserve power CPU power saving allows you to limit the maximum performance of the CPU Sc
133. activate Air View With the Air view feature you can hover your finger over the screen and Air view features will be displayed For example you can hover your finger over a scheduled item in your calendar to see more details 1 2 Note It is recommended that the Information preview function From the main Settings page tap Controls tab In a single motion touch and slide the Air view slider to the right to turn it on Tap the Air view mode field to select the method used to activate the feature Choose from Pen Finger or Auto Tap the Air view pen options field and configure the available options Information preview allows you to see information previews extended text and enlarged images when you hover your finger over the screen be enabled if using Air view 292 Progress preview allows you to preview a scene or show elapsed time when you hover your finger over the progress bar while watching a video Speed dial preview allows you to see the contacts and their Speed dial numbers when you hover your finger over them in your contacts list Icon labels by pen nib activate the ability to hover over an icon and display an on screen pop up description List scrolling allows you to enable the ability to scroll up and down a screen by holding the S Pen over the edge of the screen Sound and haptic feedback allows you to play sound and feel vibration when you hover your finger over Air view items
134. age more memory Stabilization Burst shot allows several photographs to be captured in quick succession by touching and holding the Camera button Tap to take pics allows you to tap the screen to also take a new picture vs using the Camera button Face detection allows you to adjust the camera focus based on face detection technology Audio zoom when active allows you to focus your microphone on a zoomed area during video recording 128 Settings Location tag attach a GPS location tag to the photo To improve GPS signals avoid shooting in locations where the Signal may be obstructed s lying areas or in poor weath appear on your photos whe To avoid this deactivate the ich as between buildings or in low er conditions Your location may you upload them to the Internet GPS tag setting Review set this option if you want to view each picture after you take it Select a time val e Volume key assigns a funci ue ion to the volume key Choose from The zoom key The camera key or The record key e Timer Use this for delayed Off 2 sec 5 sec or 10 sec ime shots You can set the timer to White balance Select an appropriate white balance so images have a true to life color range The settings are designed for specific lighting situations These settings are similar to the heat range for professional cameras Exposure value allows you moving the slider w
135. ails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually Signature lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails n a single motion touch and slide to the right to tum it on Tap the Signature field change the current text and tap Done to save the new signature Out of office settings allows you to both activate deactivate your email s out of office settings and configure both the start end dates and your outgoing message Messages 119 120 Default account assign this account as the default email account used for outgoing messages Password allows you to change yo ur password Email notifications activates the email notification icon to appear within the Notifications area new email is received of the status bar when a Select ringtone plays a selected ringtone when a new email message is received Vibrate activates a vibration when a new email message is received Tap the More settings field to access additional options Account name displays the name the account Always Cc Bcc myself allows you address in either the CC Bcc or No receive a copy of outgoing emails Show images allows you to view e sed by the device to track 0 include your own email ne fields Lets you always mbedded images located within the body of the currently disp layed email Auto download attachments allows the d
136. aim the arbitrator may if you prevail award your reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs as part of any award but may not grant Samsung its attorney fees expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith In a Small Claim case you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative facility and arbitrator fees or 50 00 of such fees whichever is less and Samsung shall pay the remainder of such fees Administrative facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims 350 exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees exceed 5 000 00 Large Claim shall be determined according to AAA rules In a Large Claim case the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party or apportion among the parties reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator s award in any court of competent jurisdiction This arbitration provision also applies to claims against Samsung s employees representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of the Software You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of this device To opt out you must send notice by e mail to optout sta samsung com with the subject line Arbitration Opt Out You must incl
137. ake an hour or more 310 Setting up SIM Card Lock Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code When enabled your phone will ask for a PIN number each time you use the phone Using this option you can also change your SIM PIN number 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Security 2 Tap Set up SIM card lock 3 Tap Lock SIM card enter your SIM PIN code then tap OK Note You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN code To change an existing SIM Card PIN Tap Change SIM PIN Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK Re type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK Boso Password Settings When you create a phone password you can also configure the phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an asterisk 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Security 2 Tap Make passwords visible to activate this feature Device Administration Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC This would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or stolen The phone could be deactivated or restricted through administration from a remote location 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Security 2 Tap Device
138. al Entry 1 From the Home screen tap Keypad tab 2 Press and then tap Speed dial setting 3 Touch and hold a existing on screen speed dial location and select Remove from the context menu or Press and then tap Remove Tap an entry and select Remove entry Select either Done to complete the deletion or Cancel to exit 4 Press to return to the previous screen Making a Call Using Speed Dial You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the Contacts List for speed dialing 1 From the Home screen tap Ww 2 Touch and hold a previously created speed dial location numbers 2 100 or 1 if you are dialing voice mail until the number begins to dial 3 If you are not certain of the speed dial location tap gt gt Speed dial setting and tap a speed dial number to view the assigned phone number In Call Options Your device provides a number of features that are available for use during a call Personalized call sound Call duration Dial Places a laer call on hold Background Noise Extra volume Reduction ns Ends the Adds a 2 8 call new call q Activates or speatar ka A REN Activates or Deactivates Deactivates speakerphone Mutes or Unmutes Bluetooth the call Headset Note Noise reduction and Extra volume features are disabled while using Wi Fi Calling Personalizing the Call Sound Setting During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the incoming call by se
139. al RF energy Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle Posted Facilities Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices require you to do so Potentially Explosive Environments Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion 334 or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death Users are advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling point service station Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots fuel storage and distribution areas chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked They include below deck on boats chemical transfer or storage facilities vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas such as propane or butane areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain dust or metal powders and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine Vehicles using liquefied petroleum
140. al tab gt used and free device memory The graph at the bottom Application manager of the Running tab shows used and free RAM 2 Tap the RUNNING tab to view all currently active and running applications This tab also shows the total RAM being used by these currently active applications 3 Tap Show cached processes to view additional cached applications 4 Tapa process and select Stop to end the process and stop it from running When you stop the process the service or application will no longer run until you start the process or application again Downloaded Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Applications manager 2 Tap the DOWNLOADED tab to view a list of all the downloaded applications on your device 306 Important Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the application Storage Used This option allows you to view a list on the current tab of current applications as sorted by size 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Application manager 2 Tapthe ALL tab to display all available applications 3 Press and then tap Sort by size to change the current list to show items based on the amount of Storage they occupy Reset App Preferences This feature provides you with the ability to reset all preferences for the following features Disabled apps Disabled app notifications Default applications for actions and B
141. algorithms of the Software except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation or modify or disable any features of the Software or create derivative works based on the Software You may not rent lease lend sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the Software 4 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA You agree that Samsung and its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services related to the Software provided to you if any such as IMEl your device s unique identification number device number model name customer code access recording your device s current SW version MCC Mobile Country Code MNC Mobile Network Code Samsung and its affiliates may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you At all times your information will be treated in accordance with Samsung s Privacy Policy which can be viewed at http account samsung com membership pp 5 SOFTWARE UPDATES Samsung may provide to you or make available to you updates upgrades supplements and add on components if any of the Software including bug fixes service upgrades parts or whole products or devices and updates and enhancements to any software for security previously installed includi
142. all charger If both the wall charger is connected and the battery is not installed the handset will power cycle continuously and prevent proper operation Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery can cause the device to become damaged Important It is recommended you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first time For more information refer to Enabling the USB 3 0 Connection on page 223 To connect a USB 3 0 cable to the device 1 Connect the USB cable to the charging head 2 Locate the Charger Accessory jack 3 Insert the USB 3 0 cable into the device s Charger Accessory jack 4 Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates both its charge state and percent of charge Warning While the device is charging if the touch screen does not function due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device Getting Started 13 USB 3 0 connector AA 5 When charging is finished first unplug the charger s power plug from the AC wall outlet then disconnect the charger s connector from the device USB 2 0 connector Important If your handset has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic 6 Ifyouare using the older style USB 2 0 cable to charge st
143. am them instantly on your Android device Movies previously rented via the Play Store are automatically added to your My Movies library across your devices Learn more about Google Play Movies at http play google com about movies 1 From the Home screen tap ZH Apps gt fj Google folder gt BH Play Movies amp TV Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list Following the on screen instructions for renting and viewing movies Tap the My MOVIES tab to view movies you have rented Tap the My TV SHOWS tab to view shows you have rented Play Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop and playback songs purchased from the Play Store The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download m Access the new music tab from within your Play Store application The Music application contains a music player that plays music and other audio files that you copy from your computer 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Google folder gt QV Play Music The Music app searches both your online library and your device s internal storage for music and playlists this can take from a few seconds to several minutes depending on the amount of new music added since you last opened the application 2 If prompted to join the service select either Not n
144. an Extended File System EFS Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default settings Please contact the Samsung Customer Care Center for details Important Please provide warranty information proof of purchase to Samsung s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service at no charge If the warranty has expired on the device charges may apply Warranty Information 343 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson Texas 75082 Phone 1 800 SAMSUNG Phone 1 888 987 HELP 4357 No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval Specifications and availability subject to change without notice 111611 End User License Agreement for Software IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Samsung for software owned by Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials online or electronic documentation in connection with your use of this device Software 344 This device requires the use of preloaded software in its normal operation BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS DO NOT
145. and then tap Link contact 4 Tap the second contact entry the entry in which to link The second contact is now linked with the first and the account information is merged into one screen Note The information is still maintained in both entries but displays in one record for easier viewing when you link the contacts Contacts 87 Unlinking a Contact 1 2 Note 3 88 From the Home screen tap Tap a contact name the account name from which you want to unlink an entry This reveals the details for entry Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information Tap the Connection area Press and then tap Separate contact Tap gt next to the entry you want to unlink and select OK The contacts are unlinked or separated and no longer display in the merged record screen Both contacts now go back to being separately displayed Marking a Contact as Default When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other messaging type applications the application needs to know which information is primary default in a contact entry list For example when you say Call John Smith if you have three phone records for John Smith the Voice dialer is looking for the default number or entry The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to use as the default This comes in handy when you have multiple entries for the same person 1 From the Home scr
146. ange Email account 1 From the Home screen tap E gt Email Note If you have already set up an email account and want to add an additional email account press and then tap Settings gt Add account 2 Enter your Email address and Password information e Tap Show password to display the password as you enter it in the associated field 3 Follow the on screen instructions Messages 117 Vote If prompted with an on screen notification that the connection that the Setup could not finish tap Edit details to continue with a manual update of necessary information Important Remember to manually place the cursor in the correct spot and enter a Domain name before the Domain user name entry Most servers only provide a username 4 Consult your IT Administrator if it is necessary to enable the Use client certification option 5 Identify your new work email account with a unique name Ex Work then tap Done 118 Opening an Exchange Email 1 From the Home screen tap EE gt Email 2 Tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page 3 Select an exchange email account and tap an email message Refreshing Exchange Email 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Select an email account f you are already in an email account tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page e Select an available email account 3 Tap Refresh
147. ap Delete For more information referto Deleting message threads on page 105 Draft messages displays the draft messages folder and its contents Locked messages displays the locked messages folder and its contents Scheduled messages displays the scheduled messages folder and its contents Spam messages displays the spam messages folder and its contents Text templates displays your available text message reply templates For more information refer to Text Templates on page 111 Settings allows you to access Messaging settings For more information refer to Messaging Settings on page 106 100 From the Messaging screen list touch and hold an on screen message and select an option Add to contacts allows you to add the sender to either a new or existing Contacts entry View contact allows you to view the current entry information for the sender Delete deletes the entire message and its bubbles Add to spam numbers allows you to tag a number as spam so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam folder Options while in a current message 1 2 From the Home screen tap gt Messages From within an open message press to display additional messaging options Insert smiley allows you to add insert smiley icons images emoticons Add text allows you to add text items from sources such as S Note Calendar Location Contacts and Text templates
148. ap OK Tap Allowed devices list then select the connected devices you would like to allow Tap Not allowed devices list then select the connected devices you would like to not allow Tap Download to then select the destination of any downloaded shared content Choose from USB storage Device or SD card 9 Tap Upload from other devices then select the actions you ll take when you upload content from other devices Choose from either Always accept Always ask or Always reject Screen Mirroring With feature enabled you can wirelessly mirror what is currently displayed on your device s screen with an external TV via devices such as the AllShare Cast Hub Note Screen mirroring can only be done with a compatible wireless TV or one enabled with the AllShare Cast Hub For more information refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 143 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Screen Mirroring 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Screen Mirroring slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status Note This feature allows a connection between your device and the optional AllShare Cast Hub via a shared Wi Fi Direct connection The AllShare Cast Hub then allows the communicating TV to mirror what is being shown on the device s display For more information refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 143 Changing Your Settings 257 Sound Settings From this menu you can contr
149. ard 3G 2G network speed follow these instructions to connect to these network types 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap WCDMA GSM auto connect A selection indicator displays next to this option to show that it is active This is the default mode for this device Changing Your Settings 249 Using the WCDMA 3G Only Network This option uses a 3G connection only 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap WCDMA only A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active Connecting to 3G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Using the 2G GSM Only Network If you are not using applications that require a faster network speed any application that accesses the network or uses a browser using the 2G only WCDMA network saves battery life 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap GSM only A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time 250 Network Operators Using this feature you can view the current network connection You can also scan and select a network operator manually or set the network selection to Automatic 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More network
150. are connected to the same Wi Fi 1 Launch AllShare Play Samsung Link on the target device such as an Internet TV Samsung Tablet etc 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Samsung folder gt Samsung Link Note You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before you can use this feature 3 Tap and select your device name from the Registered devices area 4 Tap an available category tab Pictures Music Video Document or Files and select a file e A file with in the upper left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web storage location Selecting this media causes your device to access the file currently stored on your services servers 5 Tap an available on screen file image or video to place a green check mark alongside it 6 Tap Stream to connected devices and select an available target device to begin streaming 7 Ona target device ex Internet TV select the on screen Allow button to continue Note At this stage your device is requesting access to share media with the external source 8 Confirm JE Samsung Link Controller enabled appears in the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you are using your device as the media source Scrapbook This application allows you to combine documents images and music into a digital scrapbook 1 From the Home screen tap Cri Scrapbook 2 Tap Start and follow the on screen tutorials Apps Settings This icon
151. ate the feature Tap the field to assign a Interval time 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes or 30 minutes and Repeat 1 time 2 times 3 times 5 times and 10 times Interval indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time Repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are assigned to this alarm How many times will the snooze silence the alarm 10 Move the Smart alarm slider to the right to activate this feature which slowly increases screen brightness and the volume of nature tones to simulate dawn breaking Tap the field to assign a interval time 1 minute 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes or 30 minutes and nature tone Fairy fountain Birdsong by the lake Sparkling mist The secret forest Serenity or Gentle spring rain Interval category describes the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time Tone category provides one of several nature sounds that are used as the alarm tone 11 Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm 12 Tap Save to store the new alarm event Turning Off an Alarm m To stop an alarm when it sounds touch and slide G9 to any direction Setting the Snooze Feature m To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds touch and slide zz to any direction Snooze must first be set in the alarm settings Deleting an Existing Alarm 1 From within
152. ation 000000 320 5 m S 352 FCC Part 15 Information to User 322 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 322 Smart Practices While Driving 322 Battery Use and Safety 324 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 325 UL Certified Travel Charger 327 Display Touch Screen 327 GPS amp AGPS i ienei eee eee eee 328 Emergency Calls 0ee cues 329 Care and Maintenance 329 Responsible Listening 330 Operating Environment 333 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices 335 Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device ssuuueueesee 336 FCC Notice and Cautions 337 6 Section 1 Getting Started This section explains how to get started with your phone by installing and charging the battery installing the micro SIM card and optional memory card and setting up your voice mail Before using your device for the first time you ll need to install and charge the battery and install the micro SIM card The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your PIN available optional services and many other features If desired you can also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone Understanding this User Manual The sections of this manual generally follow the features of
153. away excess heat 316 Research Results to Date Is there a connection between RF and certain health problems The results of most studies conducted to date say no In addition attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a connection have failed The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to Radio Frequency RF from cell phones and adverse health outcomes Still the scientific community has supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge Some of these studies are described below Interphone Study Interphone is a large international study designed to determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer A report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology June 2010 compared cell phone usage for more than 5 000 people with brain tumors glioma and meningioma and a similar number of healthy controls Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain cancer In this study most people had no increased risk of brain cancer from using cell phones For people with the heaviest use of cell phones an average of more than Y hour per day every day for over 10 years the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer However the authors determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data Additional information about Interphone can b
154. awn from industry government and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate SAR The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of watts per kilogram W kg The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1 6 watts per kilogram 1 6 W kg The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection to the public and to account for any variations in measurements SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum reported value This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network In general the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna the lower the power output of the phone Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC Tests for each model phone are performed in posit
155. ayed on screen but not playing press for additional options Multimedia 133 Favorite tags the current video as a favorite file Slideshow create a new on screen slideshow Rename allows you to rename the filename of the currently Selected video Details displays video file information Settings provide access to the Galley settings page From this page you can configure the SNS data management and Tag options Sharing Pictures Pictures are the best way of remembering the moment but an even better treat is to share them with others Two new features allow you to either instantly share a series of pictures as they are taken or quickly share a picture without using email or messaging 134 Share Shot is a great way to instantly share a series of pictures among a group of users The best example for this feature is having multiple users instantly sharing each others pictures at a company or family gathering As each person takes a separate picture with their own device they are all pooled together and instantly appear in each user s Gallery No more Email your pictures to me later Each person walks out of the event with all the pictures taken by everyone This method of image transfer requires that both devices have Wi Fi Direct active and be paired prior to use Note You can only share a shot with other external users who also have their Wi Fi Direct feature active S Beam Transfer use
156. be disabled prior to use this application requires use of a T Mobile network connection 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt d T Mobile folder gt i T Mobile My Account 2 If prompted follow the on screen information for what s new in the app Note Some features may require you to log into your account 3 The application screen provides several available options Account Info provides access to account specific features such as Notifications Device Support provides details about your current billing summary Notifications provides about both your current plan other available plans and other related services T Mobile FamilyWhere provides links to other T Mobile related information T Mobile Name ID Allows you to modify the on screen Caller ID information Name ID identifies unknown callers by Name City and State 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt sut T Mobile folder gt e T Mobile Name ID 2 Choose an on screen option T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Video on Demand 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt s T Mobile folder gt T Mobile TV The T Mobile Terms and Conditions page displays Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 2 Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions Tap Exit to close the application Not
157. bile folder gt As Mobile HotSpot From the Home screen press eil and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt Tethering and lions Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap Mobile HotSpot Configure 3 Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK 4 With security enabled delete the previous password and enter a new one into the Password field Important The more complex the password the harder it will be for intruders to break your security It is recommended that you not use names birthdays or other personal information 5 Tap Save to store the new settings To manage connected devices This feature allows you to provide MAC filtering on your device This is similar to a VIP list where only device on the list are allowed access 1 From the Home screen tap ES Apps gt Pd T Mobile folder gt Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap Mobile HotSpot gt Allowed devices 3 Tap Add new device to add devices to the allowed for connection list 4 Enter the Device name and Mac address 5 Tap OK to save the new device Changing Your Settings 243 Transmit Power Mode You can select a transmition parameter for the HotSpot You can choose to select and option that either maximizes your battery life or extends the range of the HotSpot coverage 1 From the Home screen tap A Apps gt ai T Mobile folder gt Mobile HotSpot gt Transmit power mode or From the Home screen press i and then tap Settings gt Conn
158. c gov encyclopedia specific absorption rate sar cellular telephones Health and Safety Information 321 FCC Part 15 Information to User Pursuant to part 15 21 of the FCC Rules you are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 322 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna ncrease the separati
159. cally adjust and conserve battery power Daydream allows you to control what your screen does when your device is docked or sleeping Tap the adjacent OFF ON icon to turn it on Follow the on screen instructions Auto rotate screen when enabled this feature allows the device to automatically switch from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa When this setting is disabled the device displays in portrait mode only Show battery percentage when enabled displays of battery charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of the screen Edit after screen capture when anabled this feature takes you to the Edit screen after capturing a screen image lt s Multi window Tap this option to enable disable the automatic Multi window feature 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Device tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Multi window slider to the right to turn it on 3 Tap the Multi window field to enable disable the Open in multi widow view function LED Indicator This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging missed events and incoming notifications The light will turn on by default unless you turn them off 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Device tab gt LED indicator 2 Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on or off Charging LED lights up when the device is connected to th
160. ccess this option Status displays the Battery status Battery level as a percentage Network Signal strength Mobile network type Service state Roaming Mobile network state My phone number IMEI IMEISV IP address Wi Fi MAC address Bluetooth address Serial number Up time and Device status Legal information This option displays information about Open source licences Google legal information as well as Samsung legal This information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service Terms of Service for Android powered Phones and much more pertinent information as a reference Read the information and terms then press to return to the Settings menu Device name allows you to both display and edit the device s name Model number displays the device s model number Android version displays the firmware version loaded on this device Baseband version displays the baseband version loaded on this device Kernel version displays the kernel version loaded on this device Build number displays the software build number Changing Your Settings 313 Note Firmware baseband kernel and build numbers are usually used for updates to the handset or support For additional information please contact your T Mobile service representative SELinux status displays the status of SELinux SELinux is a Set of security policies modules which is a
161. ce This section also describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering text Your device comes equipped with an orientation detector that can tell if the phone is being held in an upright Portrait or sideways Landscape orientation This is useful when entering text Text Input Methods There are two text input methods available Google voice typing provides a voice to text interface Samsung keyboard default an on screen QWERTY keyboard that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation Note SwiftKey Flow previously known as Swype can be enabled from within the Samsung keyboard to allow word creating via swiping The on screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait and landscape mode Selecting the Text Input Method The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two locations Settings Menu m From the Home screen press el and then tap Settings gt Controls tab gt Language and input gt Default and select an input method Text Input field 1 From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen E8 Select input method and select an available input method Entering Text 73 Using the Google Voice Typing This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your spoken words into on screen text You ca
162. cell phones emit while in use are in the microwave frequency range They also emit RF at substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand by mode Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects by heating tissue exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects Health and Safety Information 315 The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy Very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as is found in X rays and gamma rays can ionize biological tissues lonization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA the genetic material The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy including both radio waves and microwaves are not great enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules Therefore RF energy is a type of non ionizing radiation Other types of non ionizing radiation include visible light infrared radiation heat and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies While RF energy does not ionize particles large amounts can increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage Two areas of the body the eyes and the testes are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry
163. chase the serial number of the Product and the seller s name and address To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1 888 987 4357 If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty you must pay all parts shipping and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty service as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service What are the limits on SAMSUNG s liability THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG S RESPONSIBILITIES AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR WITHOUT LIMITATION COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT LOSS OF USE TIME DATA REPUTATION OPPORTUNITY GOODWILL PROFITS OR SAVINGS INCONVENIENCE INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQU
164. ck the device Note You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use of your device For more information refer to Security on page 310 Voicemail Setting Up Your Voicemail Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to voicemail even if your device is in use or turned off As soon as your battery is charged and the micro SIM card inserted activate your voicemail account Getting Started 17 Important Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access For new users follow the instructions below to set up voice mail Note Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network 1 From the Home screen tap and then touch and hold the 7 a key until the device dials voicemail You may be prompted to enter a password 2 Follow the tutorial to create a password a greeting and a display name Accessing Your Voicemail To access Voicemail using the menu 1 From the Home screen tap and then touch and hold 1 until the device dials voicemail 2 When connected follow the voice prompts from the voicemail center 18 Section 2 Understanding Your Device This section outlines key features of your device It also describes the device s keys screen and the icons that display when the device is in use Features of Your Device Your device is lightweight easy to use and offers many significant features The following list outlines a few of the features inc
165. ckup of your current phone settings and applications Tap Backup account to assign the account being backed up Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re installation of a previously installed application including preferences and data Tap Factory data reset to reset your device and sound settings to the factory default settings For more information refer to Factory Data Reset on page 302 Tap Collect diagnostics to collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting use For more information refer to Collect Diagnostics on page 303 Backing up Your Data Before Factory Reset Backing Up Your Contacts using an SD card Before initiating a factory reset it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use Important If you choose to back up contacts to your SIM card all information other than name and number is lost Therefore it is recommended that you back up contacts to your SD card To export a Contact list to your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Press and then tap Import Export 3 Tap Export to SD card gt OK The contacts will be stored in a vcf file on your SD card For more information refer to Export Import on page 93 Changing Your Settings 299 To copy contacts from an SD card back to your device 1 2 From the Home screen tap Contacts Press eg and then tap Import Export gt Import from SD card Atthe Save contact to prompt tap Device The contact
166. countries You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the Software including all the applicable export restriction laws and regulations 9 TERMINATION This EULA is effective until terminated Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA Upon termination of this EULA you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies full or partial of the Software 10 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE WHETHER INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE DOWNLOADED OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ON AN AS AVAILABLE BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY ACCURACY LACK OF VIRUSES QUIET ENJOYMENT NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NO ADVICE OR IN
167. d Plano TX 75074 Toll Free Tel 1 888 987 HELP 4357 Internet Address http www samsung com 92013 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device For 24 hour information and assistance we offer a new FAQ ARS System Automated Response System at www samsung com us support The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default applications occupy part of the memory The available capacity may change when you upgrade the device Nuance VSuite T9 Text Input and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications Inc or its affiliates in the United States and or other countries ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co Ltd in Japan and other countries The Bluetooth word mark figure mark stylized B Design and combination mark Bluetooth word mark and B Design are registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG microSD and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association isa registered Trademark of Openwave Inc Openwave Google the Google logo Android the Android logo Google Play Gmail Google Mail Google Maps Google Music Google Talk Hangouts Picasa YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc Wi F
168. d POLARIS Office 5 SketchBook for Galaxy and TripAdvisor si T Mobile This folder contains the following applications T Mobile TV T Mobile My Account T Mobile Name ID Visual Voicemail Mobile HotSpot and Lookout Security Customizing the Application Folder Names 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps 2 Tapa group entry then touch and hold the name of the group from the top of the on screen pop up 3 Use the on screen text entry method to replace the name 148 Action Memo The S Pen and inventive Action Memo let you quickly access the information you need while using any application You can keep a memo always nearby by pinning it to the screen Link your short notes to applications like Phone Contacts Messages and so on For more information refer to S Pen on page 41 Creating a New Memo 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt Samsung folder gt a Action Memo The action Memo screen is displayed Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to enter edit mode or Tap Create to create a new action memo Use the on screen options to create your memo Tap Save to store the new memo The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described in the following table 2 8 e Allows youto add free format drawing and change the input color Allows you to erase marks and drawings Circle an on screen text or drawing to then assign that as an action
169. d file Vote If you attach an image to your email you have the option to resize it prior to delivery Choose from Original Large 70 Medium 30 or Small 10 Once chosen tap either Always or Just once From the Home screen tap i gt Email Tap account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page Tap Inbox gt Compose Enter the recipient s email address in the To field f you are sending the email message to several recipients separate the email addresses with a comma You can add as many message recipients as you want Tap Cc Bcc to add additional carbon copy and blind copy recipients Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients e Use the Bec field to blind copy additional recipients Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject Tap B Save to store a draft of the current email on your device so that you can come back later and continue the email Tap Delete to discard the current email Once complete tap Send Configuring Email Settings 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap Select an account Press and then tap Settings and alter any of the following General settings Display allows you to configure the way in which your email list is displayed Options include Auto fit content Message preview line and Title line list Composing and sending allows you to configure the functions available during both creating and send
170. d settings for individual websites Tum on notifications Allows website notifications Select Always on On demand or Off Clear notifications Deletes website notification access information Reset settings Restores all settings to default Bandwidth management Preload webpages Allows the browser to preload Web pages Choose from Always Only on Wi Fi or Never Load images Allows web page images to load along with the other text components of a loaded website Open pages in overview Displays an overview of newly opened web pages KNOX Samsung KNOX is a comprehensive enterprise mobile solution for use with both work and play With the increasing use of smartphones in businesses Samsung KNOX addresses the mobile security needs of enterprise IT without invading the privacy of its employees This application must be downloaded to the device before use For more information go to www samsung com knox 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt Samsung folder gt 3 KNOX Tap Install and read the on screen Terms and Conditions agree to the terms and tap Confirm Follow the on screen instructions Applications and Development 175 Lookout Security Lookout Security provides mobile device specific security features that are coupled with a minimal performance hit Lookout Mobile Security provides key security options that are unique to the mobile market Along with the antivirus and anti mal
171. ddy and choose a search method Phone number number Search by ID Q to search by using a known samsung account ID to search by Country code and phone Select a country code if it differs from yours Enter the information and tap Q Search Once the recipient is matched their entry appears in the Results area Tap Add and confirm your new buddy appears in the Buddies tab For more information press Settings and tap Support Using ChatON for Chatting 1 From the ChatON application screen tap the Buddies tab 2 Select a buddy by tapping the Chat image to initiate your chat 3 Enter your message using the on screen text entry method 4 Tap Send To reply to a ChatON message 1 While the chat session is active tap the Enter message field and then type your reply message 2 Compose your reply 3 Tap Send to deliver your reply Deleting a single message bubble 1 From the ChatON application screen launch a chat session to reveal the message string 2 Touch and hold a message bubble then select Delete Chrome The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google Chrome Web browser on your device 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Google folder gt e Chrome 2 Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap Accept and Continue 3 If you have an existing Google account tap Sign in to bring your open tabs bookmarks and omnibox data from your computer to your phone otherwise tap
172. de 308 Predictive Text Activation 285 Prepend Area Code 278 Primary Shortcuts 32 Adding and Deleting 36 Customizing 36 Replacing 37 Q Quick Dialing 57 Quick Messaging 99 R Reading Mode 262 Red Eye Correction 142 Redialing the last number 63 Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories 318 Reject Call Rejection Messages 274 364 Reject Calls Managing 60 Reject List Add To 61 Add to 71 Auto Reject 61 Rejection List Assigning Multiple Numbers 61 Assigning Single Numbers 61 Rejection Messages Set Up 274 Reset 302 Reset App Preferences 307 Reset Device 302 Responsible Listening 330 Restarting Device 17 Restore 299 Restrict Background Data 246 Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile device 336 Ringtone Assigning 275 Assigning Voicemail 281 Device 259 Volume 258 S S Beam 256 On 137 256 Sharing Multiple Pictures 138 Sharing Pictures 137 S Finder Using S Pen 46 S Note 196 S Pen Functionality 42 Handwritng Input 42 43 Kepper Notification 289 Overview 41 Removing 42 Settings 289 Taking Screen Shots 43 Using 43 S Translator Translate Text 197 Translate Using Voice 197 S Voice 198 Using 198 Samsung Account Backing Up Bookmarks 301 Creating 297 Merge Contacts 84 Samsung Hub Creating a New Account 200 Using 201 Samsung Keyboard 75 ABC Mode 77 Changing the Input Type 76 Enabling 75 Entering Symbols 78 Keyboard Swipe 284 Predictive Text Settings 285 Reset Settings 2
173. display The active access point displays a bright green filled circle to the right of the name Network mode You can configure your device to either automatically select the LTE option LTEAWCDMA GSM auto connect by default WCDMA GSM auto connect GSM only or WCDMA only m From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network mode e LTE WCDMA GSM auto connect is the default network mode option This selection allows the device to choose the fastest connection from among the available connection speeds including LTE WCDMA GSM auto connect allows you to exclude the LTE network and choose from only 4G 3G and 2G networks WCDMA only restricts your connection to only the 3G network GSM only restricts your connection to only the 2G network Using the LTE Network Option To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection the device has an automatic detection method where it finds both the fastest and most stable connection communication method from among this selected set LTE 4G 3G 2G 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap LTE WCDMA GSM auto connect A selection indicator displays next to this option to show that it is active This is the default mode for this device Using the WCDMA GSM Option If you wish to not use LTE but still require a fast connection using the stand
174. displays The Samsung Keyboard This device has a built in QWERTY keypad portrait mode or keyboard landscape mode Using the QWERTY keypad keyboard you can type letter numbers punctuation and other characters To use the Samsung keyboard you must first configure the settings to default to the Samsung keyboard 1 From the Home screen press i and then tap Settings gt EJ Controls tab gt Language and input gt Default gt Samsung keyboard or From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select 32 Select input method gt Samsung keyboard 2 The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung keyboard configuration for all subsequent text input Text input field Shift key Input Mode Current Mode Send Delete Indicator Input Options Settings For more detailed information on configuring Samsung Keyboard settings see Samsung Keyboard Settings on page 283 Entering Text 75 Entering Text using Different Input Options Although the default text input method with the Samsung keyboard is to use the on screen keys you have other options Note 76 To access settings touch and hold the Input Methods button then tap pnt Settings then select it from the available options From within an active message tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard Tap Input Methods to use the default V
175. do not know that there is it is probably very small But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head and the cell phone Hands Free Kits Hands free kits may include audio or Bluetooth headsets and various types of body worn accessories such as belt clips and holsters Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is held away from the head in the user s hand or in approved body worn accessories Cell phones marketed in the U S are required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used against the head and against the body Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that hands free kits reduce risks Hands free kits can be used for convenience and comfort They are also required by law in many states if you want to use your phone while driving Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF Radiation Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that accessories which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorp
176. e Tap the Mobile data field to activate the feature A green check mark indicates the feature is active Tap the Mobile data field again to deactivate the feature a mobile data limit From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Data usage Place a check mark in the Set mobile data limit field Read the on screen disclaimer info and tap OK Touch and drag the far right ends of the Red or Orange horizontal lines to manually adjust both the Warning and Maximum data limits Touch and drag the bottom grey vertical lines to adjust the time frames Tap the Data usage cycle button and select either the current cycle or define your own by selecting Change cycle Press and then select from the available on screen options e Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage For more information efer to Data Roaming on page 248 Restrict background data prevents background data usage This can help prevent over usage of your data minutes Auto sync data allows the device to automatically sync information and updates with your various services Show Wi Fi usage activates an additional Wi Fi tab that shows you your Wi Fi data usage Mobile hotspots allows you to select available Wi Fi networks that can service as mobile hotspots Place a check mark on those entries you wish
177. e T Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be used During this initial registration process any Wi Fi connections must be disabled 3 Tap Disable Wi Fi if you currently have an active Wi Fi connection Applications and Development 209 4 Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30 day trial of the service or Tap Not Now to keep viewing the free content 5 Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing Home Live TV TV Shows Favorites Help Search Browse More Info or Live Channels TripAdvisor With the TripAdvisor you can plan and have your perfect trip With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers it is easy to find the best hotels restaurants and fun things to do 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt E Galaxy Plus folder gt DO TripAdvisor 2 Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not already done so 3 Follow the on screen instructions to use TripAdvisor 4 Press for additional options 210 Video The Video player application plays video files stored locally Important To ensure your movie viewing experience is the best possible copy the files onto your storage area Device or Card and enable the Yes Convert file option Once complete the file will now be playable on the device via the Video application Using Video The Video application plays video files stored on the SD card 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt o Video A lis
178. e The camera may not be able to properly record videos to a memory card with a slow transfer speed 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt C Camera to activate the camera mode 2 Using the camera s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject 3 Before you take a video use the Volume control buttons to zoom in or out You can magnify the video up to x4 400 percent Note Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread pinch the screen to zoom in or out For more information refer to Navigating Through the Screens on page 40 4 Tap m Video to begin shooting video The red light will blink while recording 5 Tap anywhere on the screen to re focus the camera on that object The camcorder auto focuses on the new target area 132 Tocapture an image from the video while recording tap o Take Picture This feature is not available while the anti shake feature is activated Tap a Stop to stop the recording and save the video file to your Camera folder or Tap w Pause to pause the recording Once the file has been saved tap the image viewer then tap P Play to playback your video for review Press lt to return to the viewer Accessing Videos When you shoot a video the file is saved in the Camera folder You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in the Camera folder 1 From the Home screen tap X
179. e charger Low battery LED lights up when the battery level is low Notifications LED lights up when you have missed calls messages or application events Voice recording LED lights up when you are recording voice The LED only lights up when the screen is off Lock Screen This menu contains features that allows you to configure the device s security parameters Screen Unlock Pattern Overview To secure data and limit phone access set the phone to require a screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device or every time the phone wakes up from sleep mode when the screen automatically turns off m From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Lock screen Screen lock The Screen lock menu allows to choose from a variety of locking features such as Swipe Swipe the screen to unlock it Signature Draw your signature on screen to unlock the device Note The Signature feature is available with S Pen only Pattern A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create and use to unlock your device Follow the prompts to create or change your screen unlock pattern PIN Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen Password Create a password for unlocking the screen None No pattern PIN or password is required The screen will never lock Swipe options 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Lock screen 2 Configure one of the following options Multiple widgets allows you to display mu
180. e if needed and tap OK 6 The external device must accept the connection and enter your device s PIN code Once successfully paired to an external device rap displays in the Status area Note Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth compatible devices display and operations may be different and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth compatible devices Important If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired Bluetooth headset with built in microphone verify the Call audio option is enabled within the entry s Bluetooth Settings page Changing Your Settings 239 Configuring Bluetooth Device Settings Some connected Bluetooth devices are capable of more than just functioning as a headphone but also have built in microphones for picking up voice Although both functions are detected by the device and activated there might be times when you need to change or update these settings for Phone and Media Audio can hear the other person but they can t hear me want to use my Bluetooth device only as a headphone 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap t1 Settings 3 Toggle the Call audio field to activate de activate the Bluetooth device s on board microphone 4 Toggle the Media audio field to activate de activate the Bluetooth device s headset functions Note If callers can not hear you during a call while
181. e 122 If no microSD is installed all pictures are stored on the Device For more information refer to Camera Options on page 124 Note Touch and hold fe to take a burst shot These are saved using a Fine image quality Multimedia 123 Self portrait Dual Camera Camera mode Quick Settings tan Functions Take Picture Image viewer Effects Mode Change Viewfind Record video iewfinder button 124 Camera Options Options are represented by icons across both sides of the Screen 1 From the camera viewfinder tap the Mode button to change the mode to one of the following Auto Use this mode to automatically adjust the exposure color and brightness settings This mode allows single image shots or burst shots Beauty face Use this to take photos with lightened faces for gentler images Best photo Use this to take multiple photos in a short time and then choose the best photos among them Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos When Gallery opens tap and hold thumbnails of photos to save and tap Done Best face Use this to take multiple group shots at the same time and combine them to create the best possible image Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos When Gallery opens tap the yellow frame on each face and choose the best individual face for the subject After choosing a pose for each dividual tap Done to merge the images into a single photo and tap Save
182. e HotSpot 1 Enable Wi Fi wireless functionality on your target device laptop media device etc Scan for Wi Fi networks from the external device and select your device s Mobile HotSpot name from the network list The SSID name for your device s hotspot is determined by what you entered into the Network SSID field e You can change the name by tapping Configure gt Network SSID and changing the entry Select this HotSpot and follow your on screen instructions to complete the connection Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet connection 226 To change the Portable HotSpot password 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Ei T Mobile folder gt Mobile HotSpot Tap Mobile HotSpot gt Configure Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK With security enabled delete the previous password and enter a new one into the Password field Important The more complex the password the harder it will be for intruders to break your security It is recommended that you not use names birthdays or other personal information 5 Tap Save to store the new settings To manage connected devices This feature allows you to provide MAC filtering on your device This is similar to a VIP list where only device on the list are allowed access 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt 4j T Mobile folder gt Mobile HotSpot Tap Mobile HotSpot Allowed devices
183. e a call in progress if this service is supported by the network and you have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 277 To answer a new call while you have a call in progress 1 Ina single motion touch Y and slide it in any direction to answer the new incoming call 2 Tapan option from the Accept call after menu Putting xxx on hold to place the previous caller on hold while you answer the new incoming call Ending call with xxx to end the previous call and answer the new call Note The new caller appears at the top of the list The previous caller is placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list 3 Tap Swap to switch between the two calls This places the new caller on hold and activates the previous call Important The currently active call is displayed with a green background 4 Tap Swap again to switch back Logs Tab The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers or Contacts entries for calls you placed accepted or missed The Logs tab makes redialing a number fast and easy It is continually updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list The Notification area of the Home screen upper left displays phone notifications status or alerts such as UN
184. e applications 2 Inasingle motion touch and hold the Border bar then 1 To increase the size of a desired application window 1 Tap the desired App 1 Drop drag it to resize the desired window application area top or To close a selected application bottom 1 With the two applications shown in a split screen tap With the two one of the two on screen apps to select it applications shown ina split screen tap the Border button to show the on screen functions Locate and tap Switch app location The current apps are switched 2 Tap the Border bar to show the on screen icons 3 Locate and tap e Exit the app The current app is closed and the remaining app is maximized To add more application windows with Tiles Dragging and dropping a paragraph of text or a screen shot image is now possible with Multi Window 1 Drag the Gallery app onto one of the available on screen windows Open an image folder 2 With the two applications shown in a split screen tap the Border button Q With the two App 2 Switch Border 3 Locate and tap o Drag and drop applications shown in a Positions Bar 4 Drag and drop an image from one window into the Split screen locate the other Border bar indicating the edge of the app window Note Not all apps support this feature Understanding Your Device 53 To view application windows with Tiles 1 With the two applications shown in a split screen tap
185. e found at http www iarc fr en media centre pr 2010 pdfs pr200 E pdf Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date but it did not answer all questions about cell phone safety Additional research is being conducted around the world and the FDA continues to monitor developments in this field International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users COSMOS The COSMOS study aims to conduct long term health monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there are any health issues linked to long term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell phone use The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300 000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years Additional information about the COSMOS study can be found at http www ukcosmos org index html Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence MOBI KIDS MOBI KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people This is an international multi center study involving 14 European and non European countries Additional information about MOBI KIDS can be found at http www creal cat programes recerca en projectes creal view php ID 39 Surveillance Epidemiology and End Results SEER Program of the National Cancer Institute The National Cancer Institute NCI actively follows cancer statistics
186. e issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes m For more information refer to Wi Fi Calling on page 252 Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings 2 Tap one of the following options Caller ID chooses whether your number is displayed when someone answers your outgoing call Choose from Network default Hide number or Show number Call forwarding configures the forwarding settings Auto area code allows you to automatically prepend a specific area code to all outbound calls Call barring blocks specific types of calls All outgoing calls International calls etc Changing Your Settings 277 Call waiting notifies you of an incoming call while you are on another call Auto redial automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to connect or the call is cut off Fixed dialing numbers manages fixed dialing numbers Configuring Call Forwarding 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings Call forwarding Important Call Forwarding is disabled when the Wi Fi Calling feature is enabled 2 Tap an available option Always forward incoming calls are re routed to a secondary number that you specify Forward when busy forwards all your calls to voicemail when your phone is busy Forward
187. e location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory m From the Home screen tap ERE Apps gt Contacts For more information refer to Contacts List on page 79 Downloads Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current downloaded files Internet and Other 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Samsung folder gt n Downloads 2 Place a checkmark on an available file to select it 3 Choose an available action such as Share Delete Sort by size date or Clear list Dropbox Works to provide access to your desktop files directly from your device This applications allows you to bring your files with you when you re on the go edit files in your Dropbox from your device upload photos and videos to Dropbox and share your selected files freely with family and friends The in device application works in conjunction with a partner program placed on a target computer using an active Internet connection Dropbox creates a folder that automatically synchronizes its contents across all of your connected devices on your account Update a file to your Dropbox on your computer and its automatically updated to the same folder on your other devices Download the Desktop application 1 Use your computer s browser to navigate to http www dropbox com 2 Follow the on screen setup and installation instructions on your target computer containing the desired files Im
188. e orientation if desired 2 Tap Sym to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode Once in this mode the text input type shows C AB 3 Tapa number symbol or emoticon character 4 ABC to return to ABC mode To enter symbols 1 Tap Sym to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode 2 Tapthe appropriate symbol key or Tap ES button to cycle through additional pages The first number on this key indicates which page 1 or 2 of additional characters is active 78 Section 5 Contacts This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List You can save phone numbers to your phone s memory Accounts From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to synchronize send and receive data at any given time or if you want the applications to synchronize automatically After determining how you want the accounts to synchronize indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts list 1 Sign in to your Google account 2 From the Home screen press eil and then tap Settings gt rud General tab Accounts and then navigate to the My accounts area Note The Accounts area lists those accounts that have been added to the device and provides an Add account button to quickly and easily add new ones Contacts List um C Omm Contacts Contacts field 3 Check Text Usage t Tabbed Contacts Navigation Contacts 79 Creating a Contact The default storage location for saving phone number
189. e to start the selected song from the beginning or allow the application to automatically recommend a start point Settings allows you to change your music player settings Details allows you to view media info such as Artist Title Album Track length Genre Track number Format Size and Location End closes the application Music Settings The settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background sound effects and how the music menu displays 1 From within the Music application press gt Settings 2 Select one of the following settings Music menu this menu allows you to select which categories you want to display Choices are Albums Artists Genres Music square Folders Composers Years Most played Recently played or Recently added Tap each item that you want to display in the Music menu e SoundAlive set a type of equalization such as Normal Pop Rock Jazz Dance Classic etc Adapt Sound enable or disable the adaptive sound feature to adjust to the sound levels of your current environment Applications and Development 181 Play speed set the play speed anywhere between 0 5X and 2 0X using the slider Music auto off when enabled sets a timer for the Music application to automatically turn off after a pre selected amount of time Lyrics when activated the lyrics of the song are displayed if available
190. eature You must be on the cellular network to use the manage feature When you have two participants in a multi party session it might be necessary to place one of those participants on hold so that a private conversation can be held with a single caller While you are in a multi party call 1 Press eil and then tap Manage conference call 2 Tap lt Split Caller adjacent to the participants you would like to split from the current multi line call The list displays the callers in the order they were dialed Call Functions and Contacts List 67 Note The Manage conference call option is not available for multi party calls created while using the Wi Fi Calling feature You must be on the cellular network to use the manage feature 3 Tapthe participant to which you want to speak privately You can now talk privately to that person while the other participants can continue to converse with each other If there is only one other participant that person is placed on hold 4 Toreturn to the multi party call tap the Merge icon All of the multi party call participants can now hear each other 68 Dropping One Participant 1 Press and then tap Manage conference call gt to the right of the number to drop The participant is disconnected and you can continue the call with the other participant 2 Tap fis to end your conversation with the remaining caller Call Waiting You can answer an incoming call while you hav
191. ections tab gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot gt Transmit power mode 2 Select an avialable option Maximize battery life increases your battery life by reducing the power used for HotSpot transmition This option reduces the transmition range Maximize hotspot range increases the range of your transmission while at the same time decreasing battery life 244 USB Tethering This option allows you to share your device s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your device and a single computer The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Note You can not mount your device s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http www samsung com us support downloads To connect using USB Tethering 1 From the Home screen T Mobile folder gt E Apps gt fit gt Mobile HotSpot in From the Homes screen press and then tap Settings gt M Connections tab gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot gt Mobile HotSpot Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your device Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu This places a green check mark next to the entry and activates the feature A Tethering or HotSpot active notification briefly appears on the screen Look for t
192. ed Dialing 0 00000e 63 In Call Options 00 65 LOGS Tab d Ree d del nce eet ane nite ace 69 Section 4 Entering Text 73 Text Input Methods 00 73 Selecting the Text Input Method 73 Using the Google Voice Typing 74 Using the Samsung Keyboard 75 Section 5 Contacts 79 ACCOUNS 5 1 reri fn eg ar ed 79 Contacts List 00000 ceca 79 Finding a Contact 82 Contact List Options 84 Contact Menu Options 85 Contact Entry Options 86 Linking Contact Information 86 Sending a Namecard 00 89 Copying Contact Information 90 Synchronizing Contacts 91 Display Options 92 2 Additional Contact Options 92 GROUPS etie o SER ERREUR RO 94 The Favorites Tab ceeeeeee 96 Section 6 Messages 97 Types of Messages sss 97 Creating and Sending Messages 98 Message Options 000000e 99 Viewing Newly Received Messages 103 Deleting Messages 105 Message Search 0ee eee 105 Messaging Settings 0005 106 Assigning Messages as Spam 109 Accessing Your Spam Folder
193. eed to use your Google account to sign in to the Play Store The home page provides several ways to find applications The home page features applications and includes a list of item applications by category a list of games a link to search and a link to My apps 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt gt Play Store 2 Browse through the categories find an application you re interested in and tap the name 3 Read the application descriptions Applications and Development 191 Important If the selected application requires access to data or control of a function on your device the Play Store displays the information the application will access Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application Once you tap OK on this screen you are responsible for using this application on the device and the amount of data it uses Use this feature with caution 4 Tap INSTALL gt ACCEPT Note Use caution with applications which request access to any personal data functions or significant amounts of data usage times 5 If prompted follow the on screen instructions to pay for the application 6 Check the progress of the current download by opening the Notifications panel The content download icon X appears in the notification area of the status bar 192 7 On the main Play Store screen press E and then tap My apps tap an installed application in the list and then tap OPEN Tip The newly downloaded ap
194. een tap 2 Tap a Contact entry 3 Press and then tap Mark as default The Mark as default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact name phone number or other contact information 4 Tapthe radio button next to the entry information you want to be the primary information such as name phone number or email and select Done Note If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry assigning one as the default will automatically dial that number when the contact is selected for dialing Sending a Namecard A Namecard contains contact information and can be sent to recipients as a Virtual Business Card V card attachment using Bluetooth Google Mail or as a message 1 From the Home screen tap B 2 Tap a Contact entry 3 Press I and then tap Share namecard via and select a delivery method Bluetooth ChatON Email Exchange or Internet Evernote Create Note Gmail Messages or Wi Fi Direct The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and is delivered when you send the message Note Email appears as an option only after an Internet or Exchange email account has been created For more information refer to Sending Contacts via Bluetooth on page 241 Sending All Current Namecards Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time you can send all of your current entries at once 1 From the Home screen tap E 2 Press and then tap Share namecard via 3 Tap Select all to place
195. een more responsive and easier to use 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Smart screen slider to the right to turn it on 3 Tapany of the following options to create a checkmark and activate the features Smart stay disables the screen timeout if your phone detects that your face is watching the screen Smart rotation disables the auto screen rotation by checking the orientation of your face and the device Smart pause pauses videos when your device detects that your head has moved away from the screen Smart scroll once your eyes have been detected the screen will scroll according to your device s tilt angle Tap the adjacent field to the right of the Smart scroll field to activate the feature With Smart scroll the screen will scroll depending on the phone s tilt angle once your eyes have been detected To activate High Touch Sensitivity Activating this feature allows you to increase the screen s sensitivity to touching while wearing gloves 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab 2 Place a check mark alongside the Increase touch sensitivity field to turn it on Add Account This menu allows you to set up manage and synchronize accounts including your Google and email accounts Adding an Account 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt RH General tab Accounts 2 Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap Add account and
196. ejection list Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu or via the Auto reject list menu The Contacts menu option assigns all numbers for an individual as rejected The Auto reject list allows to assign individual numbers To assign multiple numbers as rejected via Contacts 1 2 From the Home screen tap Contacts Locate an entry and tap it to open the Contact Overview Screen page 86 Press and then tap Add to reject list All phone numbers associated with this entry are then added to the reject list To assign single number as rejected via Auto reject list 1 3 From the main Call settings page tap Call rejection gt Auto reject list Tap Create and either enter the phone number or select a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list Tap Save to complete the assignment International Calls 1 From the Home screen tap KI and then touch and hold O until the device shows on screen Use the on screen keypad to enter the country code area code and phone number If you make a mistake tap single digit or Touch and hold CI to delete all digits Tap E once to delete a Call Functions and Contacts List 61 Pause Dialing You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with automated systems such as voicemail or financial phone numbers 2 Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after a two second
197. elete the currently selected Contacts entry Share via allows you to send the current Contact entry s information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth ChatON Evernote Create Note Email Exchange or nternet Gmail Messages or Wi Fi Direct Link contact allows you to link the current contact to another current contact Similar to a see also feature If you can t remember a contact s information linking entries can help you find the person you are looking for Add shortcut to home adds a shortcut to the current Contacts entry to an available screen location Contacts 85 Contact Entry Options 1 From the Home screen tap Ey 2 Tap an entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen This screen contains Name contact numbers email and linked contact information 3 Press i to reveal the context menu specific to this entry 4 Tap an available option Contact Overview Screen 86 Linking Contact Information Most people now maintain multiple email accounts social networking logins and other similar account information For example a Facebook account login name might differ from a corporate email account login because they are maintained separately and for different groups of people This device can synchronize with multiple accounts When you synchronize your phone with those accounts each account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list If one of your con
198. eout the accessibility feature after a defined amount of time 4 Tap Lock automatically to lock the screen automatically after a selected amount of time Note The Lock automatically function is only available if your device is already using the screen lock feature 5 Select the Speak passwords field to activate this feature which reads out password information 6 Select Answering ending calls field to select the methods you can use to answer and end a call 7 Tap Easy touch mode allows you to easily tap the screen to stop snooze alarms calendar events and timers and accept reject incoming calls 8 Tap Show shortcut allows you to press and hold Power End to use the accessibility shortcut under the Device options screen 9 Tap Manage accessibility to save and update your accessibility settings or share them with another device You can export your settings import a previously saved file or share your file with another device Changing Your Settings 271 10 Note Tap TalkBack to activate the feature TalkBack when installed and enabled speaks feedback to help blind and low vision users Important TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter 11 12 13 except passwords including personal data and credit card numbers It may also log your user interface interactions with the device Tap the Font size field to change the size of the fonts used on the device within menus options etc
199. epetitive motion injuries When you repetitively perform actions such as pressing keys drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers or playing games you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands neck shoulders or other parts of your body When using your device for extended periods hold the device with a relaxed grip press the keys lightly and take frequent breaks If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use stop use and see a physician f your device has a camera flash or light do not use the flash or light close to the eyes of people or pets 122011 Section 12 Warranty Information Standard Limited Warranty What is covered and for how long SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA LLC SAMSUNG warrants that SAMSUNG s handsets and accessories Products are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date Phone 1 Year Batteries 1 Year Case Pouch Holster 90 Days Other Phone Accessories 1 Year What is not covered This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product This Limited Warranty does not cover a defects or damage resulting from accident misuse abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to liquid moisture dampness sand or dirt neglect or unusua
200. er 2 Replace existing notification panel buttons by n a single motion touch and drag an available button from the bottom of the screen into a location within the Notification panel area 270 One of the 10 default buttons is then replaced with the new Selection 3 Tap Reset to restore the Notification Panel buttons to their original configuration Easy Mode This application allows you to leave your display using the default layout of Standard mode or provide an easier user experience for the first time smartphone users using Easy mode 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Device tab gt Easy mode 2 Activate the feature by moving the activation slider indicated by RSM Accessibility Settings This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility applications that aid in navigating your Android device such as TalkBack uses synthesized speech to describe the results of actions KickBack provides haptic feedback for actions and SoundBack plays sounds for various actions Also lets you enable use of the power key to end calls 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt oe Device tab gt Accessibility Note Initially it might be necessary to download accessibility applications from the Play Store 2 Select the Auto rotate screen field to activate this feature which automatically rotates an available screen 3 Tap Screen timeout to tim
201. er s message service The Multimedia Messaging Service MMS lets you send and receive multimedia messages such as picture video and audio messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s multimedia message service Important During the creation of a text message adding an image sound file or video clip automatically changes it from a text message SMS to a multimedia message MMS Message Icons on the Status Bar Messaging icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display when new messages are received For more information refer to Status Bar on page 24 Note The Messages application can also be accessed by pressing and then tapping E Apps gt Messages Messages 97 Creating and Sending Messages 1 Note 98 From the Home screen tap gt Messages gt Compose Tap the Enter recipient field to manually enter a recipient or Tap Em to select from one of the following Groups to select a recipient from the Group list Favorites to select a recipient from the Favorites list Contacts to select a recipient from your Contacts list valid entries must have a wireless phone number or email address Logs to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages If adding a recipient from these categories tap the contact to place a check mark then tap Done The
202. er text into the top box and it will automatically be translated into the lower box 4 Tapthe selected O Translate button within the bottom field The top target language field is then updated with the new translation To translate using your voice Important The two on screen buttons at the bottom of the application correspond to the two currently selected languages Applications and Development 197 1 Atthe S Translator screen tap the left voice button to S Voice verbally speak the selected language corresponds to Launches your phone s built in voice recognition system that top field allows you to initiate several common tasks without having 2 Wait a few seconds until the on screen notification to touch the device shows Speak in then speak using the selected This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide language variety of functions on your device This is a natural language 3 Within a few seconds confirm the translated text now recognition application appears in the other translation field This goes beyond the Google Search Voice Actions feature 4 Taptheselected amp Speak button to translate that simply recognizes Google commands and search terms You can ask it questions Is it raining in Dallas or give it using your selected input language and voice id p commands Show me where to find cheap gas Example if trying to speak in English and get a Spanish translation
203. eraction Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually Messages 115 Signature lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails In a single motion touch and slide the Signature slider to the right to turn it on Tap the Signature field change the current text and tap Done to save the new signature Default account assign this account as the default email account used for outgoing messages Password allows you to update your password to match the information on the email server Email notifications activates the email notification icon to appear within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new email Gmail etc is received Select ringtone plays a selected ringtone when a new email message is received Vibrate activates a vibration when a new email message is received 116 Tap the More settings field to access additional options Account name displays your uniquely created account display name Your name displays the name used in the From field of your outgoing email messages Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC Bcc or None fields Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails Show images allows you to view embedded images located within the body of the currently displayed email Security options allows you to enable several secu
204. ernal recipient Lock Unlock locks or unlocks the currently selected message bubble from being accidentally deleted Share allows you to share the contents of the currently selected bubble Choose from Add to Dropbox Bluetooth ChatON Email Evernote Create Note Flipboard Gmail Google Google Hangouts Messages S Note Scrapbook or Wi Fi Direct Copy to SIM copies the currently selected message bubble as a single text message within the SIM card View message details displays details for the currently selected message bubble Translate translates the text from the currently selected bubble into a desired language Deleting Messages Deleting message threads 1 2 From the Home screen tap P Touch and hold a message from the Messages list then select Delete or Press and then tap Delete threads tap each message thread you want to delete and tap Delete Deleting message bubbles 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap P Open a message to reveal the message string Touch and hold a message bubble then select Delete Message Search You can search through your messages by using the Message Search feature 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap P Press and then tap Search Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then tap QI All messages that contain the entered search string display Messages 105 Messaging Settings To confi
205. es or other damages Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the driver s clear view of the street and traffic Health and Safety Information 323 Never use wireless data services such as text messaging Web browsing or e mail while operating a vehicle Never watch videos such as a movie or clip or play video games while operating a vehicle For more information go to http www ctia org Battery Use and Safety Important Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries and particularly from the continued use of damaged batteries Do not disassemble crush puncture shred or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery Do not put a high degree of pressure on the battery This can cause leakage or an internal short circuit resulting in overheating 324 Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids Liquids can get into the phone s circuits leading to corrosion Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard If the phone and or battery get wet have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung even if they appear to be working properly Do not place your battery in or near a heat source Excessive heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the battery to explode Do not dry a
206. es out of the reach of small children FCC Notice and Cautions FCC Notice The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment The FCC can require you to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be eliminated Cautions Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly approved by Samsung could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment Only use approved batteries antennas and chargers The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device Although your mobile device is quite sturdy it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken Avoid dropping hitting bending or sitting on it Other Important Safety Information Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the mobile device in a vehicle Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly When using a headset in dry environments static electricity can build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock To minimize the risk of electr
207. essages as Spam You can now assign either a phone number as spam or use a key term or phrase Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with your Spam messages folder To assign a phone number from Messages list as spam 1 From the Home screen tap di 2 Touch and hold a message from a phone number 3 Select Add to spam numbers and tap OK To assign a phone number manually as spam 1 From the Home screen tap P 2 Press and then tap Settings More tab 3 Locate and activate the Spam settings option Spam settings when enabled allows you to configure available spam settings 4 Tap Add to spam numbers gt Add This function allows you to manually enter and assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source Messages 109 5 Tap the Number field to manually enter phone number or Tap m to select from either your existing Logs or Contacts or Tap Match criteria and select a parameter that must match for the spam action to take effect Choose from Same as Starts with ex 800 or 888 Ends with or includes 6 Tap Save To register text phrases as spam Some incoming messages might not be associated with a phone number but rather an email address In these cases the only way to block those messages would be assign a key used term or phrase to activate the Spam block Ex Dear friend Stock Alert or Act Now 1 From the Home screen tap v 2 Press and then tap Settings More tab
208. et new card information will begin to appear in the Google Now list of cards Note Google Now will recognize searches and display them on your device even if that search took place on your home computer or on another device These searches are linked into your Google Account Applications and Development 163 Google Settings As Google has become more intertwined with other applications this menu provides a quick and ready access point to configure preferences for Google Maps amp Latitude Location etc You can also use the Search function to initiate a Google Search from this menu 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt iv Google folder gt Google Settings and select an on screen option 2 Select one of the available on screen options 3 Follow the on screen prompts 164 Google Google makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier You can set up Circles of friends visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google 1 Signon to your Google account 2 From the Home screen tap Apps 3 fe Google folder gt Google 3 Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google Tap Add account to create another account Follow the on screen instructions to use Google 5 Visit www google com mobile for more informa
209. etermined that the claim was brought in bad faith In a Small Claim case you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative facility and arbitrator fees or 50 00 of such fees whichever is less and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees Administrative facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees exceed 5 000 00 Large Claim shall be determined according to AAA rules In a Large Claim case the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party or apportion among the parties reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator s award in any court of competent jurisdiction This arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNG s employees representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the Product s sale condition or performance You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product To opt out you must send notice by e mail to optout sta samsung com with the subject line Arbitration Opt Out You must include in the opt out e mail a your name and address b the date on which the Product was purchased c the Product model name or model number and d the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number as applicable if you have
210. ettings menu 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt Bluetooth Verify Bluetooth is active indicated by TEN Press e and tap the Visibility timeout Received files and Help fields to set the options Changing the Device Name 1 From the Home screen press eil and then tap Settings gt General tab gt About device Tap the Device name field and use the on screen keyboard to edit the current device name Tap ae to erase the current device name and enter a new name for this device using the keyboard Tap OK to confirm your setting Changing Your Settings 237 Activating Visibility 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Bluetooth 2 Verify your Bluetooth is active 3 From the top of the Bluetooth settings page toggle the state of the visibility check mark Activating this feature makes your device visible and allows other devices to pair and communicate Note Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible time out field 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 1 Hour or Never timeout Press Menu gt Visibility timeout This value appears as a countdown within this Visibility timeout field Scanning for Devices This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you can pair with them 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Bluetooth 238 2 From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page tap Scan to
211. evice Important Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the same Wi Fi 1 Launch Samsung Link on the target device such as an Internet TV Samsung Tablet etc 2 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt PX Gallery Note You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before you can use this feature 3 Open a selected image 4 Tap oy Stream to connected devices and select an available target device to begin streaming 5 Ona target device ex Internet TV select the on screen Allow button to continue Note At this stage your device is requesting access to share media with the external source 6 Confirm T AllShare Controller enabled appears in the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you are using your device as the media source Taking a Screen Shot Also known as a screen capture this feature allows you to mimic the print screen function on most computers 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt E3 Controls tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Palm motion slider to the right to turn it on 3 Read the on screen notification and tap OK Note At least one feature must be activated before Palm motion can be activated 4 Inasingle motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position 5 With the current screen showing the desired image in a single motion place the side of your palm along the one side of the device and then
212. evice as many times as you d like You will have the ability to re download the Media Content later subject to content re download availability and content provider permissions You may need network coverage to access Media Content you have acquired through the Service e You can use 3G 4G or Wi Fi connectivity to download Media Content Unlike purchased Media Content rented Media Content will be viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized device s SD card No SD Card included out of box 202 Your Media Content may pause stop or not download in networks where there is a weak signal You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a license acquisition has occurred and b sufficient amount of the Media Content has been buffered You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set out for each piece of content which may be as short as 24 consecutive hours Stopping pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not extend the available viewing time n no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of more than thirty 30 days or shorter on a title by title basis after the Media Content has been rented g if you begin viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction but do not finish viewing the entire title that rented edia Content may not be available for the entire twenty four
213. evice to automatically download email attachments when an active Wi Fi connection is detected This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G LTE network connection Auto resend times enables the phone to resend an outgoing email a specified number of times if delivery fails The default is 3 auto resends Folder sync settings allows you to configure the sync settings for various folders such as Inbox Drafts Outbox etc Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync calendar events Choose from 2 weeks 1 month 3 months 6 months or All calendar Empty server trash allows you to delete your email account trash bin remotely Incase of sync conflict allows you to assign the master source on emails If there is a conflict with the current email sync you can assign the server as the main source for all emails Server has priority or assign the phone to be the main source and update the server accordingly Device has priority S Security options allows you to enable several security options Such as Encrypt Encryption algorithm Sign Sign algorithms Email encryption cert Email signing cert and Security policy list These security policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers Security policy list lists the current email s security policy These policies could restrict some functions from c
214. favorite artists show off your functions artwork and connect with other artists This community brings together anyone that uses the S Pen to draw sketch scribble or paint Share pictures comment on other creations or just browse through the pages for something to add to your personal collection 1 From the Home screen tap EHI Apps gt Samsung folder gt PEN UP 2 From the main screen tap either Sign up or Explore PEN UP 3 Follow the on screen instructions Phone This application provides the ability to make or answering calls access the Contacts list which is used to store contact information m From the Home screen tap iW Phone For more information refer to Call Functions and Contacts List on page 56 Play Books Formerly known as Google Books this application allows you to read over 3 million ebooks on the go Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books jump right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks Personalize the reader to your liking pick up reading where you left off on your phone or computer and settle down with a great book on your Android phone Note You must logged into your Google account prior to using this feature 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt iv Google folder gt YI Play Books 2 If prompted tap Turn sync on This synchronizes your books you have previously selected between your Books account and your device
215. ff You can drop off your Samsung branded mobile device and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung Recycling Direct SM locations A list of these locations may be found at http pages samsung com us recyclingdirect usactivities environment samsungrecyclingdirect locations jsp Samsung branded devices and batteries will be accepted at these locations for no fee Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or batteries at many retail or carrier provided locations where mobile devices and batteries are sold Additional information regarding specific locations may be found at hitp www epa gov epawaste partnerships plugin cellphone index htm or at http www call2recycle org 326 Mail It In The Samsung Mobile Take Back Program will provide Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label Just go to http fun samsungmobileusa com recycling index jsp and follow the instructions to print out a free pre paid postage label and then send your old mobile device or battery to the address listed via U S Mail for recycling Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler To find the nearest recycling location go to our website www samsung com recyclingdirect Or call 877 278 0799 Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices and batteries Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with local regulations In some areas the
216. folder contains downloads you have made Movies this folder contains your Video and Movie files sat Music this folder contains your Music files Notifications this folder contains all of the notifications you have received Pictures this folder contains the screenshots you have captured Ringtones this folder contains any ringtones you have purchased Note Different folders may appear depending on how your phone is configured 3 Once you have located your file tap the file name to launch the associated application My Magazine Enjoy all of your available updates in a single place My Magazine recommends content information and applications within a single location 1 From the Home screen press i or From the Home screen flip up from the bottom of the Screen 2 Tap Next read and agree to the Terms of Use and tap Start Applications and Development 185 Navigating My Magazine Changing Received Content 1 Menu Omnibutton Options Category Options 186 Scroll up or down the on screen pages to view more 1 Tap Menu to view available options content 2 Tap gt Options to select or deselect content Swipe left or right to move among the previous or next assigned to each page page PEN UP Tap an available tile to view more details T This Samsung application allows you to join a an online Tap me Omni button to quick access common community follow your
217. g Context Menus Context menus also called pop up menus contain options that apply to a specific item on the screen They function similarly to menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on your desktop computer m Touch and hold an item on screen to open its context menu Understanding Your Device 55 Section 3 Call Functions and Contacts List This section describes features and functionality associated Making a Call with ena or oho ies and the Contacts list which You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the p Mu store PODER SIM card or to the device s memory These entries are Displaying Your Phone Number referred to as the Contacts list m From the ps screen press E and then tap 1 From the Home screen tap Phone Settings gt MI General tab gt About device gt 2 Enter the phone number and then tap Eu um Your displays in the m If you make a mistake while dialing tap gt gt to bs sce icd Es clear the last digit Touch and hold _ to clear the Note The device s Settings menu can also be activated entire sequence by pressing MM and then tapping EE Apps gt Settings Note When you activate the Auto redial option from within the gt gt Call settings gt Additional settings menu the device automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not answer the call or is already on the phone provided your call
218. g responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their accessories in the areas where you drive Always obey them The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas For example only hands free use may be permitted in certain areas Before answering calls consider your circumstances Let the call go to voicemail when driving conditions require Remember driving comes first not the call If you consider a call necessary and appropriate follow these tips Use a hands free device Secure your phone within easy reach Place calls when you are not moving Plan calls when your car will be stationary Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and will suspend the call if necessary Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an automobile Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near the windshield of an automobile In other states the law may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile Be sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an automobile Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in fines penalti
219. gas such as propane or butane must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard NFPA 58 For a copy of this standard contact the National Fire Protection Association When your Device is Wet Do not turn on your device if it is wet If your device is already on turn it off and remove the battery immediately if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery leave it as is Then dry the device with a towel and take it to a service center FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices The U S Federal Communications Commission FCC has established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices hearing aids and cochlear implants use wireless mobile devices they may detect a buzzing humming or whining noise Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise and mobile devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices Not all mobile devices have been rated Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on the box The ratings are not guarantees Results will vary depending on the user s hearing dev
220. ge the CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR tempered glass surface and void the warranty For HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION more information please refer to the Standard Limited Warranty Health and Safety Information 327 GPS amp AGPS Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning System GPS signal for location based applications A GPS uses satellites controlled by the U S Government that are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan FRP Changes may affect the performance of location based technology on your mobile device Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global Positioning System AGPS which obtains information from the cellular network to improve GPS performance AGPS uses your wireless service provider s network and therefore airtime data charges and or additional charges may apply in accordance with your service plan Contact your wireless service provider for details Your Location Location based information includes information that can be used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit location based information Additionally if you use applications that require location based information e g driving directions such applications transmit location based information The location based information 328 may
221. gt Wi Fi Press and then tap Advanced 3 Tapthe Auto network switch to activate the feature that would allow the device to connect to the best available signal connection Install certificates 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press and then tap Advanced Tap Install certificates and follow the on screen instructions Finding your WI Fi Address Information 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press and then tap Advanced Locate the MAC Address and IP Address information at the bottom of the screen MAC address view your device s MAC address required when connecting to some secured networks not configurable P address view your device s IP address Manually Adding a Wi Fi Network 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Add Wi Fi network 2 Enter the Network SSID the name of your Wireless Access Point 3 Tap the Security field and select a security option This must match the current security setting on your target WAP Wireless Access Point 4 Enter your WAP s password if the WAP is secure 5 Tap Connect to store the new information and connect to the target WAP Note An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN Its purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN whether accidentally or intentionally To communicate wireless devices must be configured with t
222. gure the settings for text messages multimedia messages Voice mails and Push messages 1 From the Home screen tap wu 2 Press and then tap Settings The following Messaging settings are available within the following available tabs General Tab General settings Delete old messages deletes old messages when the limit is reached rather than overwriting them Text message limit allows you to set a limit on how many text messages are allowed in one conversation Multimedia message limit allows you to set a limit on how many multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation Display Bubble style allows you to choose from several bubble styles for your messages Bubbles are the rounded boxes that surround each message Background style allows you to choose from several background styles for your messages 106 Split view when in Landscape mode allows you to view both the message list and the contents of the currently selected message Use the volume key allows you to change the text size by using the up or down volume keys Signature settings Add signature when enabled this feature allows you to create a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages Signature text allows you to enter a desired signature for your message SMSIMMS Tab Text message SMS settings Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered Manage
223. hase the connector cable 1 From the main Call settings page tap TTY mode 2 Tap TTY Full TTY HCO or TTY VCO to activate the feature or TTY Off to deactivate the feature Off is the default setting 282 HAC Mode This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid Compatibility for this device m From the main Call settings page tap Hearing aids field to activate the feature green check mark or tap it again to deactivate the feature Off is the default setting Blocking Mode When Blocking mode is enabled notifications for selected features will be disabled You will only receive notifications of incoming calls from people on your allowed list 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Device tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Blocking mode slider to the right to turn it on Confirm the Blocking mode active icon e appears in the Status bar 3 Place a green check mark adjacent to those features you would like to enable Choose from Block incoming calls Turn off notifications Turn off alarm and timer Turn off LED indicator 4 Configure a timeframe for these features to be active Remove the check mark from the Always field to configure the From and To time fields 5 Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are exempted from these rules Choose from None All contacts Favorites or Custom Allowed contacts will then appear in the Allowed contact list Language and Inpu
224. he Tethering active icon A in the Status bar area of the screen Read the on screen notification regarding data use and tap OK To disconnect tethering 1 From the Home screen c ER Apps gt si T Mobile folder gt gt Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap USB tethering frome the Tethering menu to remove the check mark and deactivate the feature 3 Remove the USB cable from the device Airplane Mode This mode allows you to use many of your device s features such as Camera Games and more when you are in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited Important When your device is in Airplane mode it cannot send or receive any calls or access online information or applications 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Airplane mode slider to the right to turn it on 3 Tap OK The Airplane mode icon gt f is displayed at the top of your screen Changing Your Settings 245 Data Usage Monitor and mange your device s data usage capabilities Features include activation deactivation or network data usage set mobile data usage for a set period of time and view application data usage From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Ml Connections tab gt Data usage Connections To activate deactivate Mobile data usage 1 To set 1 246 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Data usag
225. he on screen QWERTY keyboard Cursor control when enabled allows you to control your on screen cursor by moving your finger across the keyboard 284 Predictive Text Advanced Settings The predictive text system provides next letter prediction and regional error correction which compensates for users pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards Note Only available when ABC mode is selected Predictive text advanced settings are available only if the Predictive function is enabled 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab gt Language and input gt Samsung keyboard or From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods gt 5t to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Predictive text slider to the right to turn it on 3 Tap the Predictive text field and configure any of the following advanced options Live word update allows the device to automatically update its word database with popular new words every day Personalized data activate this feature to use the personal language data that you have entered and selected to make your text entry prediction results better By enabling this feature you can choose from the following personalization features Learn from Facebook allows you to log into your current Facebook account and add used text to your personal dictionary Learn from Gmail allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail
226. he same SSID Changing Your Settings 233 WPS Push Button The WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup feature sometimes associated with a physical or on screen button on most WAPs allows you to pair your device and WAP without the need for entering a passcode This process is similar to Wi Fi Direct pairing In this case once the WPS feature is active on your WAP your device can then detect it and then immediately pair to it Note WPS capable routers appear in the Wi Fi list of available devices with the term WPS available below their name To pair your device using WPS 1 234 Follow the WPS activation instructions specific to your Wireless Access Point From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press then tap WPS push button Once the connection is complete confirm the external router now appears in the Wi Fi list as connected WPS PIN Entry If a WPS Push Button does not work there is an alternative WPS connection method where you would use a device generated PIN number to establish the connection This number is then entered into your WAP s WPS client PIN field to complete the connection To pair your device using WPS PIN 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press then tap WPS PIN entry Write down the generate PIN number and enter it into your Wi Fi Router s client PIN field Once the connection is complete confirm the external router now appears
227. he sum of the two values equals M5 Under the standard this should provide the hearing aid user with normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless mobile device A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent performance However these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied T ratings work similarly 336 The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 standard HAC for Newer Technologies This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses However there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations using your hearing aid or cochlear implant to determine if you hear any interfering noise Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility If you have questions about return or exchange policies consult your service provider or phone retailer Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device Your mobile device is not a toy Do not allow children to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others damage the mobile device or make calls that increase your mobile device bill Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessori
228. hite balance exposure in to adjust the brightness level by Guidelines Display viewfinde when selecting subjects guides to help composition Flash activate or deactivate the flash Voice control activates deac allows you to verbally take a p ivates voice control feature that hoto Contextual filename allows you to have your location added as part of the filename You m described above st first activate GPS tag Save as flipped when set to On this option allows you to take and save a mirror image video when using self recording mode Storage Select the memory location for storage Shutter sound Turn the shutter sound on or off Reset Reset the camera setti ngs Multimedia 129 Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options Delete T allows you to delete the current picture After you take a photo or record a video you can access 3 Press for additional options such as various options Edit in Portrait mode allows you to edit the current image Photo viewing options Favorite allows you to assign the current image as a favorite 1 Tap a thumbnail to view the picture Slideshow allows you to see your photos in a slideshow Note If no control icons are displayed on the screen in Photo frame takes the current image and creates a addition to the picture tap anywhere on the screen to surrounding photo frame that can be edited w
229. home page Sets the current home page for the Web Text scaling allows you to preview the text size scale the text browser size using a slider bar set the zoom amount on double tap and Auto fill forms Allows you to set the text used for the Web minimize the font size using a slider bar formatos feature Force zoom allows you to override the website s request to Privacy control zoom Search and Web address suggestions displays predictions e Text encoding adjusts the current text encoding of related queries and popular websites in the address bar as Full screen allows you to use Fullscreen mode to hide the you type Status bar Preload available links before opening allows you improve Text booster allows you to boost the text size on PC websites performance when loading pages to make it easier to read 174 Content settings Accept cookies Allows sites that require cookies to save and read cookies from your device Turn on location Allows websites to request access to your location Turn on JavaScript Enables Javascript for the current Web page Without this feature some pages may not display properly Remove the checkmark to disable this function Block pop ups Prevents popup advertisement or windows from appearing on screen Remove the checkmark to disable this function Default storage Allows you to set your default storage to Device or Memory Card Website settings View advance
230. i is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance Inc LTE is a trademark of ETSI Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype Inc 9 2010 Swype Inc All rights reserved Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise intermittent sounds like a siren or nearby conversation and echoes allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere How Does It Work Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system the technology Captures evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone and the person you re speaking with Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise so the person you re calling hears only your voice without disturbing background noise Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience so you can hear clearly and don t need to speak louder to overcome surrounding noise The noise suppression technology is built in and already enabled in your new mobile phone So it s ready to provide unsurpassed voice clarity with every call Table of Contents Section 1 Getting Started 7 Slatus Bal i2scesurdire petere 24 Understanding this User Manual 7 Home Screen uuuueuuueusuuu 30 Removing the Battery Cover 8 Customizing the Scree
231. ice and hearing loss If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference you may not be able to use a rated mobile device successfully Trying out the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs M Ratings Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled M4 is the better higher of the two ratings M ratings refer to enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode T Ratings Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled T4 is the better higher of the two ratings T ratings refer to enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode Hearing devices may also be rated Your hearing aid manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find this rating Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to interference noise Under the current industry standard American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 the hearing aid and wireless mobile device rating values are added together to indicate how usable they are together For example if a Health and Safety Information 335 hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating t
232. igh Touch Sensitivity 295 Hold Placing a Call on Hold 66 Home 30 Home Screen Assigning a New 35 Changing Wallpaper 38 Menu Settings 32 Overview 30 Home screens Customizing 34 Homepage Setting New 172 l Icons Description 24 Indicator 24 Status 24 Images Assigning as a Contact icon 140 Assigning as wallpaper 140 Transferring 300 Verifying 300 Importing and Exporting To micro SIM card 93 In Call Options 65 In call Options 66 Incognito 171 Create Window 171 Exit Window 171 Incoming Call Vibration Setting 258 Indicator icons 24 International Call 61 International Calls Making 61 Internet 168 Brightness Setting 169 Search 170 Set Home Page 174 Set New Homepage 172 Internet Email 111 IP Address 313 IR Smart Remote 19 L Language Select 283 286 359 Linking Contact Information 86 Live Wallpaper Selecting 39 Lock Pattern If 1 Forgot My Pattern 267 Lock Screen 263 Changing Wallpaper 39 Say Wake Up Command 264 Shortcuts 263 Logs 69 Accessing 70 Accessing from Notifications 70 Altering Numbers 71 Erasing 72 Lookout Security 176 Low battery indicator 15 LTE Network Mode 249 Selecting 249 LTE Network 249 M Magnification Gestures 272 360 Making Emergency Calls 58 International Calls 61 New call 56 Managing Applications Clearing Application Cache 305 Uninstalling Third party Applications 305 Market see Play Store 191 Marking contact As a default 88 Media Backing Up to microSD Card 301
233. ightly out 4 Replace the battery cover Getting Started 11 Installing the Battery Before using your device for the first time install the battery and charge it fully Important Before removing or replacing the battery make sure the device is switched off To turn the device off hold down the eme key until the Device options pop up displays then tap Power off To install the battery 1 Slide the battery into the compartment 1 so that the tabs on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone making sure the connectors align 2 Gently press down to secure the battery 2 12 To remove the battery wm Grip the battery at the top end and lift it up and out of the battery compartment Installing Battery Replacing the Battery Cover Position the battery cover over the battery compartment and press down until you hear a click When replacing the battery cover do not apply pressure to the screen squeeze as this can damage the screen Charging the Battery Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li ion battery A wall charger which is used for charging the battery is included with your device Use only approved batteries and chargers Ask your local Samsung dealer for further details Before using your device for the first time you should fully charge the battery Charging Head A By Sx USB 3 0 Cable Note Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the w
234. ing emails Options include Quick responses Default image size Delay email sending Auto advance allows you to assign an action after an email is eleted Choose from Next email Previous email or Email list Confirm deletions requires that you provide confirmation before deleting a selected email Priority senders allows you to assign Contacts as priority enders configure a priority sender inbox assign email otifications ringotnes and vibration patterns for emails from these senders EE gt Email r Q eo gt Spam addresses allows you to create a list of spam email addresses Rules for filtering allows you to create and manage filters for emails Filter parameters include Filter name Subject includes or From Split view mode when in Landscape mode turns on the split view mode that allows you to view both the message list and the contents of the currently selected message or Press E and then tap Settings gt Account settings gt lt Account gt Alter any of the following settings Sync settings to configure the following sync options Sync Email enables automatic email synching between your device and the remote server Sync schedule allows you to control the email sync schedule on both Peak and Off Peak times Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user int
235. ing from a Screen 36 Managing 35 Primary 32 Signature Unlock 264 SIM Micro 7 9 see also micro SIM 9 SketchBook for Galaxy 207 SkyDrive 205 Smart Alarm 157 Smart Clip 42 Using 45 Smart Practices While Driving 322 Smart Screen 47 291 295 On 295 Smart Switch 19 Snooze 157 Repeat 156 Software Update 313 Wi Fi 314 Song Set As 181 Sound Adapt Sound 261 Sounds Hearing Aids 273 Turn Off All 273 Spam 111 Accessing Your Spam Folder 111 Add a Phrase 108 110 Add Number 100 101 104 Assigning Manually 109 Assigning Phone Numbers 109 Block Unknown Numbers 110 Block Unknown Senders 108 110 Email Addresses 115 Manually Add a Number 108 109 Match Criteria 110 Registering a Phrase as Spam 110 Settings 108 109 Spam Messages 100 Assigning 100 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information 320 Speed Dial Changing an entry 64 Making a call 64 Removing an entry 64 Setting up entries 63 Split Screens Group Play 166 Standard Limited Warranty 339 Status Bar 24 Sub Menus Navigation 55 SugarSync 205 SwiftKeyFlow Samsung Keyboard 284 Swype see SwiftKey Flow 73 System Volume 258 System Manager 303 System Tone Settings 260 T Task Manager 146 Tethering Active Icon 224 245 Disconnecting 224 245 see USB Tethering 223 244 Text Booster Accessibility 174 Text Input Methods 73 Text Input Method Selecting 73 Text Templates 111 Create Your Own 111 Text To Speech 287 Text to speech Configuration 287
236. ings gt General tab gt Back up and reset gt Collect diagnostics and turn off the Allow Diagnostics feature Changing Your Settings 303 Date and Time This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed 1 From the Home screen press E and then tap Settings gt General tab Date and time 2 Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network set the date and time Important Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set the rest of the options 3 Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the Month Day and Year then tap Set 4 Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons set Hour and Minute Tap PM or AM then tap Set 5 Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network set the time zone information automatically 6 Tap Select time zone then tap a time zone 7 Tap Use 24 hour format If this is not selected the device automatically uses a 12 hour format 8 Tap Select date format and select the date format type 304 Accessory This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when using a car or desk dock 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Accessory Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or removing the phone from the dock Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock speakers when the phone is docked Tap Desk home screen display if you wish to show the desk home screen when the device is docked Tap Automatic un
237. inue to confirm the password 4 Confirm the PIN by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in order to unlock the device PIN and Password options 1 268 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Lock screen Configure one of the following options Clock widget options allows you to show the dual clock on the lock screen adjust the Clock size and show the date Personal message allows you to enter a customized personalized message that is displayed on the lock screen Owner information allows you enter text to display on the lock Screen Lock automatically sets the timeframe in which the device will automatically lock after the screen turns off Lock instantly with power key allows you to either enable disable the function whereby the device instantly lock after pressing the power key Action Memo on lock screen allows you to open the Action Memo when double tapping the lock screen with S Pen Password Lock and Unlock 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock Tap Password Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to confirm the password Confirm the password by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Wallpaper To assign a wallpaper The Wallpaper settings option allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen Lock screen or both 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Set
238. ions and locations e g at the ear and worn on the body as required by the FCC For body worn operation this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a minimum of 1 0cm from the body Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines This mobile phone has a FCC ID number A3LSMN900T Model Number SM N900T and the specific SAR levels for this mobile phone can be found at the following FCC website http www fcc gov oet ea The SAR information for this device can also be found on Samsung s website http www samsung com sar SAR information on this and other model phones can be accessed online on the FCC s website through http transition fcc gov oet rfsafety sar html To find information that pertains to a particular model phone this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone follow the instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone Additional SAR information can also be obtained at http www fc
239. ions that have been loaded on your device computer tablet as of the date of purchase Information concerning third party applications that you may choose to download from the Google Play Store or otherwise should be obtained from the application provider directly Tip To open applications quickly add the icons of frequently used applications to one of the Home screens For more information refer to Customizing the Screens on page 34 You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that will display on all Home screens If you add an application as a primary shortcut the application icon will not be displayed in the Applications menu Applications The Applications list provides quick access to all the available applications on the device The Application menu provides quick access to the most frequently used applications Applications display on each of the three panels on the Applications screens Important Once you log into your Google account any previously downloaded or purchased applications will be available from the My Apps section in the Google Play Store Application Screen Menu Settings When on the Apps screen the following menu options are available 1 Press MB and then tap EA Apps 2 Press and then select from the following options Edit allows you to organize your current applications by moving them around the screen edit or delete existing Apps folders Applications and Developmen
240. iously entered phone number Contacts 83 4 Enter additional information such as Email Groups Ringtone Message alert Vibration pattern or tap Add another field to input additional category information Add another field contains the following options Phonetic name Organization IM Address Notes Nickname Website Internet call Events or Relationship Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories 5 Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry Deleting Contacts Important Once Contacts list entries are deleted they cannot be recovered 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select Delete gt OK 84 Contact List Options 1 2 From the Home screen tap Press The following options display Delete allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts Business cards allows you to access previously photographed business cards Tap to begin framing then photographing a new business card This process automatically import that information to update either an existing contact or create a new one Import Export imports or exports contacts to or from the USB storage location SIM card or SD card Share namecard via allows you send selected namecards via methods such as Bluetooth ChatON Email Evernote Create Note Gmail Messages or Wi Fi Direct Merge accounts
241. is not sent to voicemail Note If your screen goes black during your interaction with the device launching Keypad etc you might be accidentally swiping over the front sensors 56 Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List 1 From the Home screen tap EB Contacts 2 Locate a contact from the list 3 Ina single motion touch and drag your finger over the number by going to the right This action places a call to the recipient Running a Call in the Background If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home Screen you are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the green phone icon within the Status bar This is the best way to stay on your current call and do something else multi task such as access the Contacts list view a recent email locate a picture etc In Call Notification Story Album Ending a Call m Briefly tap key to end the call Note To redial a recent number tap atthe end of the call or locate the number from the Logs list tap the entry and tap Call Ending a Call from the Status Bar 1 Froman active call you can launch a separate application or return to the Home screen The current call is kept active in the background 2 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 3 Tap End to end the currently active call Call Functions and Contacts List 57 Making E
242. is now ready for either removal or formatting Understanding Your Device 29 mh Displays when the External SD card is being o2 prepared for mounting to the device This is required for communication with the External SD card Displays when the microSD card has been A improperly or unexpectedly removed 0 Displays when storage within either the internal 2 location or the external SD card has reached its capacity It is recommended you either move files off or delete them to make additional room Oxy Displays when Power saving mode is enabled Li Displays when the Power saving alert notification has been activated You are then prompted to view your current battery level Displays when TTY device has been inserted vn P For more details on configuring your phone s settings see Changing Your Settings on page 228 30 Home Screen The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications on your phone There are initially five available panels each populated with default shortcuts or applications You can customize each of these panels Signal strength Battery status Connection Status Status Bar Time Notification area Status area Shortcuts Screen Primary Shortcuts Notification area displays those icons associated with end user notifications such as email messages calls missed call in progress new voicemail upcoming event USB connection Emails and Text MMS messages
243. is sent Note Your destination device must support this feature or no entries will be received by the external device Send individual namecards allows you to set your default to send individual contacts one at a time Even if you select all your entries each is sent individually Contacts 93 Groups This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call group This group can be one of the already present groups Family Friends or Work or a user created group Creating a New Caller Group 1 94 From the Home screen tap 3 Groups tab Press and then tap Create Tap the Group name field and use the on screen keypad to enter a new group name For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 73 Tap Group ringtone and select a ringtone for the group Selections are Default ringtone Ringtones select from available ringtones or Add to navigate your device and select an existing audio file Tap Message alert and select a message alert ringtone to be associated with this group Tap Vibration pattern and select a unique vibration pattern either from an available list or Create your own This pattern is then associated with this group Tap Add member to add Contacts to the new group 9 From the available list of contacts tap the contact s you want to add A check mark displays next to contact entry Then tap Done or Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all cu
244. isplay 3 Tap the contact s to which you want to send an email A check mark displays next to the selection Note The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen 4 Tap Done 5 Select an email account type 6 Compose the email and tap Send ExportlImport For more information refer to Copying Contact Information on page 90 Contact List Settings From this menu you can determine the default storage location for Contacts display your phone s primary number and view service numbers listed in your Contact list 1 From the Home screen tap B 2 Press and then tap Settings Configure any of the following options Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those contacts containing phone numbers List by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted First name or Last name Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are listed First name ex Steve Smith or Last name first Smith Steve Service numbers lists the currently available service numbers Contact sharing settings allows you configure how your Contacts entries are sent individually or as a single file containing all available entries Tap Settings to select a share setting Send all namecards allows you to set your Contact sharing option to all so that your entire Contacts entries are sent as a group and not as multiple single files If all your entries are Selected only a single file
245. isted under the Backup account option If not Tap Backup account gt Add account and sign into your Google account Tap the checkbox next to Automatic restore to create a checkmark This will restore the settings that were backed up when you re install an application Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your device and sound settings to the factory default settings From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Backup and reset gt Factory data reset 2 Read the on screen reset information 3 Tap Reset device 4 If necessary enter your password and tap Delete all The device resets to the factory default settings automatically and when finished displays the Home Screen Collect Diagnostics This feature only collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting Use 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Backup and reset Collect diagnostics 2 Read the on screen System Manager Application information Note This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that T Mobile technicians can better troubleshoot issues with your device 3 Choose to enable or disable the feature by placing a check mark in the Allow Diagnostics field 4 Select either More Info to read additional information or Close to close the message screen Important Selecting Close only closes the current description Screen and does not disable data collection To disable data collection go to Sett
246. isting email message Google Use Google Search to search the Web Google Now9 a part of the Google application recognizes a user s repeated actions performed on the device including access of common locations repeated calendar appointments search queries etc This information is then used to display more relevant information to the user in the form of cards These scrollable on screen cards are displayed when the Google Now application is launched These cards are not manually added The service uses your GPS Google Search and usage information to generate these cards automatically m From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt EJ Google folder gt Fl Google and enter the search text Tip Press and hold SM Home and then tap S Google Now or Tap on the Google Search bar and say the search information To initially set up Google Now 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt Google folder gt ea Google 2 Follow the on screen instructions to review the available information 3 When prompted agree to launch the application Some initial on screen cards are shown A default is the Weather card that provides updated weather information in your area To configure the Google Now settings 1 From the Home screen tap fv Google gt IS Google 2 Press I and select Settings 3 Access each desired Settings page and configure it as desired Apps 3 When these condition are m
247. item to an available application such as Call Contacts Messages Email Internet Maps Calendar event Displays additional functions Allows you to edit the current color Detaches the current memo and converts it in a small popup box Reduces the number of on screen options Closes the current session and save the action memo Cancels the current memo Saves the current memo and creates a new one 4 Addan additional page to the memo 5 From within the main application screen select the following functions Search fey allows you to search for information within existing memos Create i allows you to create a new memo Delete qui allows you to delete an existing memo Bloomberg This application provide access to the latest business news and data no matter where you are 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Galaxy Plus folder gt Bloomberg Read the on screen Terms and Conditions information and then tap ACCEPT Follow the on screen instructions Applications and Development 149 Calculator Using this feature allows you to use your device as a calculator The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions addition subtraction multiplication and division You can also use this as a scientific calculator 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt E Samsung folder gt Calculator 2 Enter the first number using the numeric keys 3 Enter the operation for
248. ith edited text or display them drawn object then saved Photo note allows you to write notes on your current image 2 The following options are available at the top of the and then save it SCreen Signature allows you to edit the current image using the photo Change player Ex allows you to select a different editor AllShare Samsung Link device from your available list Copy to clipboard allows you to copy one or more pictures to Share via El allows you to share the picture via ChatON a different folder Group Play Add to Dropbox Bluetooth Email Evernote Print allows you to print the current image on a compatible Create Note Flipboard Gmail Google Hangouts Messages Samsung printer PEN UP Picasa S Note Scrapbook Sketchbook for Galaxy Rename allows you to rename the current file and Wi Fi Direct Buddy photo share allows you to share the current image Edit m in Landscape mode allows you to edit the current with active ChatON buddies image Launches the Photo Editor application For more Rotate left allows you to rotate the view of the current image in information refer to Editing a Photo on page 141 a counterclockwise direction 130 Rotate right allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a clockwise direction Crop provides an on screen box that allows you to crop the rrent picture Tap Done to update the image with the new imensions
249. itional log information from the current entry Copy to dialing screen press to pass the current number to your dialer and then edit the selected number before you place your next outbound call Delete press E to delete the Contacts entry Send number press to send the current Contacts entry information to an external recipient Add to reject list press to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list Similar to a block list the selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone Touch and hold an entry to display the entry specific context menu Copy to dialing screen to make alterations to the current phone number prior to redial Add to contacts to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts Send number to send the current Contacts entry information to an external recipient View contact to view the information for the currently stored Contacts entry Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list Similar to a block list the selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list a Altering Numbers from the Logs List If you need to make a call from the Logs screen and you need to alter the number prior to dialing you can add the appropriate prefix by prepending the number 1 From the Home screen tap re Logs tab
250. l communications medical emergencies for example Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas plan an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel Remember to make or receive any calls the mobile device must be switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device networks or when certain network services and or mobile device features are in use Check with local service providers To make an emergency call 1 Ifthe mobile device is not on switch it on 2 From the Home screen tap Ww 3 Key in the emergency number for your present location for example 911 or other official emergency number Emergency numbers vary by location 4 Tap EM If certain features are in use call blocking for example you may first need to deactivate those features before you can make an emergency call Consult your User Manual and your local cellular service provider When making an emergency call remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident do not cut off the call until given permission to do so Care and Maintenance Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this p
251. l physical electrical or electromechanical stress b scratches dents and cosmetic damage unless caused by SAMSUNG c defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen d equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data code removed defaced damaged altered or made illegible e ordinary wear and tear f defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories products or ancillary peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG g defects or damage resulting from improper testing operation maintenance installation service or adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG h defects or damage resulting from external causes such as collision with an object fire flooding dirt windstorm lightning earthquake exposure to weather conditions theft blown fuse or improper use of any electrical source i defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception Warranty Information 339 or transmission or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product or j Product used or purchased outside the United States This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 8096 of rated capacity or the battery leaks and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if i the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for
252. lan an exercise program that is right and safe for you Consider it the first Step on your path to physical fitness 196 S Note Use this application to create notes with productivity tools that turn handwriting into typed text and correct drawn shapes lines and formulas to make them perfect 1 From the Home screen tap Apps 9 IS 6 note 2 Tap Start select a cover style by tapping an on screen selection and tap Next 3 Select an available template and tap Next 4 Synchronize your note with an available account type Choose from Samsung account Evernote or Set later 5 Tap Start to begin creating your note S Translator Allows you can easily translate words and phrases verbal or text messages into many different languages Note Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 297 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt Samsung gt ay S Translator 2 If prompted follow the on screen steps to install the full version of the application 3 If prompted follow the on screen instructions to log into your Samsung account To translate text 1 Atthe S Translator screen tap the top language bar to select your target source language Default is Spanish 2 Tap the bottom language bar to select the destination language that you would like to translate to Default is English US 3 Ent
253. le if your Defa recordings would be named Voice 001 Voice 002 Voice 003 It name is Voice your Noise reduction allows you to activate deactivate background noise suppression Logo display allows you to display a custom logo on the recording screen Location tag allows you to attach location information onto the file as additional information Language allows you to select an available language for use with the voice memos Skip interval allows you to assign a skip length End allows you to exit the application Voice Search Launches the Google Now application that is used for voice to text Internet searching 1 From the Home screen tap ES Apps gt Ev Google folder gt Voice Search 2 When prompted speak into the built in microphone 3 Use the on screen options to find a matching search term VPN Client This is a full featured VPN Client that provides support for the latest IPSec VPN standards and provides interoperability with support for all major VPN Gateways 1 From the Home screen tap HE Apps 9 Samsung folder gt A VPN Client 2 Follow the on screen instructions to configure the VPN Client Options include Add VPN Connection or My VPN Connections Applications and Development 215 WatchON Important Before initiating use verify you have an active Internet connection available either mobile network or Wi Fi connection Note Before beginning your initial
254. lect a method in which to share this audio file Selections are Add to Dropbox Bluetooth ChatON Email Evernote Create Note Gmail Messages Scrapbook or Wi Fi Direct Refer to each specific section depending on the method you selected to send this voice recording Delete allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings Tap the recordings to delete and tap Done gt OK Change category allows you to assign the currently selected recording to a user created category entry Sort by allows you to sort the current Ii recent Date oldest Name or Category e Search allows you to search for key tel list st by either Date most ms within the existing Manage categories allows you to exis category entries 214 ing user created Settings the following settings are available Storage allows you to choose where your recordings will be saved Select between Device or Recording quality allows you to set Itimedia messages High Normal or Limit for m Recording volume allows you level to either Hig Contextual filename req adjust the filename based on con your current GPS or Low location Default name al etc lows you ires 0 SE GPS text emory card the recording quality to the recording volume tagging allows you to al information such as 0 choose the name prefix for your recordings For examp
255. lecting an audio equalizer setting for the current call 1 Tap 2 Confirm the option is enabled Personalize call sound Note If prompted to enable the feature via the Call settings menu go to Call settings gt Personalize call sound 3 Select an available option Choose from Adapt Sound Soft sound Clear sound and Off Call Functions and Contacts List 65 Placing a Call on Hold You can place the current call on hold whenever you want If your network supports this service you can also make another call while a call is in progress To place a call on hold 1 Tap Hold to place the current call on hold 2 Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold To make a new call while a call is in progress 1 Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it up in Call history 2 Once connected tap Add call to dial the second call 3 Dial the new phone number and tap ES To switch between the two calls m Tap feted Swap The previous In call number turns gray and displays On hold The new active call displays a green background behind the number 66 More In call Options During a call you can save the current caller s information to the Contacts list or create a Memo m Press I and then select an available in call option Contacts During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list Browse the Contacts list for the information you need Action Memo During a call it may be necessary to
256. less network or enable the GPS satellites Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Location services 2 Tap Access to my location to enable sharing your location with requesting applications 3 Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite 4 Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location 5 Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite locations To receive better GPS signals avoid using your device in the following conditions inside a building or between buildings in a tunnel or underground passage in poor weather around high voltage or electromagnetic fields in a vehicle with tinted windows Opening Maps 1 From the Home screen tap BR Apps gt 3 Maps 2 Tap Accept amp continue from within the Welcome page 3 Tapthe bottom right My location button to find your location on the map with a blinking blue dot 4 Locate the top row of the buttons to access additional options Applications and Development 177 Messages This application allows you to use the Short Message Service SMS to send and receive short text messages to and from other mobile phones You can also use the Multi Media Service MMS to create multimedia me
257. loaded and installed We recommend that you check availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of your device If you want to avoid any use of network data for the Update downloads then you should choose the Wi Fi Only option in the Setting 6 Some features of the Software may require your device to have access to the internet and may be subject to restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi Fi 346 connection the Software will access through your mobile network which may result in additional charges depending on your payment plan In addition your enjoyment of some features of the Software may be affected by the suitability and performance of your device hardware or data access 7 SOFTWARE TRANSFER You may not transfer this EULA or the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software accompanied In such event the transfer must include all of the Software including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades this EULA and you may not retain any copies of the Software The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA terms 8 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that the Software is subject to export restrictions of various
258. lock if you are using an optional S View phone cover and you want your phone to automatically unlock when you open the cover Tap S View window color to set the window color when you are using the optional S View protective cover Tap Select info shown cover to select the information that you want displayed when you are using the optional S View protective cover Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or Surround Application Manager This device can be used for Android development You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this device then run the applications using the hardware system and network This feature allows you to configure the device for development Warning Because the device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company end users operate these devices at their own risk This menu allows you to manage installed applications You can view and control currently running services or use the device for application development You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data cache or defaults m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Application manager ALL Clearing Application Cache and Data Important You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature 1
259. lows you to quickly access your documents based on file type Each type is separated into several available tabs located at the bottom of the screen such as Word Excel PowerPoint Other and PDF Favorites allows you to list only those documents tagged as Favorite View Together once connected to the same Wi Fi you can share or collaborate with other Polaris users S Health S Health is a wellness application that allows you to better manage your health by providing you with relevant information Note Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 297 1 From the Home screen tap EHI Apps gt Samsung folder 9 v3 S Health 2 Read the introduction and tap Start 3 Read the Terms and conditions information place a checkmark in the Agree checkbox 4 Tap Next 5 Tap Sign in to log into your personal Samsung account or tap Skip to continue 6 Enter your personal information then tap Next 7 Follow the on screen instructions to use S Health 8 Press l and then tap Help for more detailed information Before You Start Exercising This app can be used to monitor your exercise While moderate physical activity such as brisk walking is safe for most people health experts suggest that you talk with your doctor before you start an exercise program particularly if you have any
260. ltiple widgets on your lock screen Appears as an options after a lock mode is enabled Clock widget options allows you to show the dual clock on the lock screen adjust the Clock size and show the date Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock screen Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on Personal message allows you to enter a customized personalized message that is displayed on the lock screen Changing Your Settings 263 Owner information allows you enter text to display on the lock Screen Unlock effect sets the effect you receive when unlocking the device You can select None Watercolor or Ripple effect Ink effect sets the coloring for the on screen ink used in writing drawing Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to wake up your phone Action Memo on lock screen allows you to open the Action Memo when double tapping the lock screen with S Pen Help text shows help information on the Lock screen Using Swipe This feature is the least secure locking method and only requires that a user swipe the screen to unlock the device 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab Lock Screen 2 Tap Screen lock gt Swipe 264 Using a Signature to Unlock This feature uses a recognized on screen signature to unlock the device 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock gt Signature Remove your S Pen From
261. luded in your device Touch screen with virtual on screen QWERTY keyboard Brilliant 5 7 Full HD Super AMOLED 1920 x 1080 Multi core processor LTE 2 3 GHz Multi Core Processor 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access Plus HSPA Android 4 3 Jelly Bean Platform USB 3 0 connector for faster transfer speeds Galaxy Gear compliant For a list of compatible smartphones please visit www samsung com us galaxygearsupport Smart Switch compliant For more information see www samsungsmartswitch com KNOX compliant For more information see www samsung com knox Support for Air View and Air Gestures S Pen functionality S Pen Optimized Features Air Command Action Memo Scrapbook Screen Write S Finder Pen Window S Note Multi Window new Easy Clip and Direct Pen Input Wi Fi Capability WatchON Rich TV experience with Infrared IR remote Access Movies TV Shows Music Games and Books with Samsung Hub Samsung Link to share your media content across connected devices Cloud connectivity is enabled via the use of an external Web storage service Compliant with AllShare Cast Hub not provided 13 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus with smart stabalization LED flash and zero shutter lag Full HD recording 30fps 2 Megapixel Front Facing camera for Video Chat Video Codec H 264 MPEG 4 H 263 VC 1 WMV7 WMV8 Sorenson Spark MP43 VP8 HEVC
262. m Press and hold the Back key D This action hides the Multi window tab from view Repositioning the Multi Window The Multi window contains two components tab and apps panel The tab can be manually moved across the screen The apps panel containing the scrollable apps can be relocated to lock onto the different sides of the screen To move the tab Up or Down 1 Activate the Multi window feature page 48 Press and hold the Back key to view the tab 3 Ina single motion touch and hold the tab gt for approximately one second then slowly drag it to its new location along the current screen edge Note This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you can t get to a button or option behind it Understanding Your Device 49 To relocate the Multi window apps panel 1 Activate the Multi window feature 2 Tapthe tab to display the apps panel containing the scrollable apps Note Its only when the tab is detached that the entire panel can be relocated N 3 Inasingle motion touch and hold D for approximately one second to detach it from the screen then slowly drag it to its new location along any other available Screen edge 50 Customizing the Multi Window apps The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi window can be organized by either being rearranged or removed To rearrange the Multi window applications 1 2 Activate the Multi window feature Tap the tab to display the
263. m a specific country or region Improve YouTube allows you to anonymously send YouTube information to help improve the application Connected TVs Allows you to pair your device to a wireless TV running a YouTube application Options include Add a TV and Edit TVs Search Clear search history allows you to clear previous YouTube searches from showing up in the YouTube search box Never remember history allows you to force YouTube to never store search history information SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for videos containing restricted content This option blocks these videos from appearing within your search results Choose from Don t filter Moderate or Strict Preloading Preload subscriptions allows you to preload or go get videos while on Wi Fi and charging your subscription videos Preload watch later allows you to enable the preload function on selected videos so you can watch them later Read the data usage information and tap OK to accept the terms Note Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your device s storage space and may result in additional charges if your Wi Fi plan is not unlimited About Help provides answers to most YouTube questions Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube Google Mobile Terms of Service YouTube Terms of Service Google Mobile Privacy Policy YouTube Privacy Policy Open source
264. me screen to scroll among the seven panels Drag Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to move it Do not release your finger until you have reached the target position Rotate Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to landscape by turning the device sideways For example rotate to landscape orientation when entering text to provide a larger keyboard or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling Pinch Pinch the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom out when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers inward to zoom out Spread Spread the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers outward to zoom in Note These screens can be re arranged in any desired order For more information refer to Customizing the Screens on page 34 Motion Navigation and Activation The device comes equipped with the ability to assign specific functions to certain device actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope Note Motion must be enabled for this feature to be active For more information refer to Motions and Gestures Settings on page 290 S Pen The S Pen is a stylus that assists you in performing different functions By using the Pen button you can minimize having to switch between touch and pen input Air View is a new S Pen technology that allows you to hover over the touch
265. mergency Calls If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on the phone the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card Without a SIM card you can only make an emergency call with the phone normal cell phone service is not available Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card installed 1 Tap Emergency call from the on screen display to make an emergency call 2 Enter 9 1 1 and tap ES Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call features 3 Tap as to exit this calling mode 58 Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency number a 1 tap process Before you can resume normal calling operations you should first exit this mode 1 Swipe the Lock screen to unlock the device 2 From the Home screen tap N 3 Enter the emergency number ex 911 and then tap 4 Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call features Note This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly than a normal calling mode 5 Atthe Emergency Callback screen follow the on screen instructions Dialing Options When you enter numbers on the Keypad you will see three on screen options From the keypad screen use one of the following options Voicemail Ee to access your
266. n a call is in progress Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when a call is on hold Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when an active call is routed through a Bluetooth headset Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when you have missed an incoming call Displays when you device is set to automatically reject all incoming calls The All numbers option is enabled from within Call settings gt Call rejection gt Auto reject mode menu Displays when the speakerphone is on Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when the microphone is muted Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized For more information referto Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 277 Displays your current battery charge level Icon shown is fully charged Displays when the current battery is 100 percent charged andthe Display battery percentage option is enabled within the Settings gt Device tab gt Display menu gt Show battery percentage Displays your battery is currently charging Understanding Your Device 25 4t st st t 26 Displays your current battery charge level is low Charge 28 15 Displays your current battery charge level is very low Charge 15 5 Shows your current battery only has up to 4 power remaining and
267. n indicates this Es Home screen icon at the top of the selected screen Managing Shortcuts Note To move a shortcut from one screen to another you must carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the screen As the shortcut turns light blue you can begin to move it to the adjacent screen If this does not work delete it from its current screen Activate the new screen and then add the selected shortcut Understanding Your Device 35 To add a shortcut from the Applications screen 1 From the Home screen select a screen location for your new shortcut by scrolling across your available screens until you reach the desired one Tap Apps A to reveal all your current available applications By default applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid Scroll across the screens and locate your desired application Touch and hold the on screen icon The new shortcut then appears to hover over the current screen While still holding the on screen icon position it on the current screen Once complete release the screen to lock the shortcut into its new position To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen 1 36 From the Home screen navigate to a screen with an empty area Touch and hold an empty area of the screen From the Home screen window tap Apps and widgets 2 Apps 4 Scroll across the pages and in a single motion touch and hold an application to place a copy on the curren
268. n information and tap Next If this is your first time using the service you may be prompted to enter a PIN code Note You must subscribe to the Visual Voicemail service to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 3 Tap an on screen voicemail message to play it back To check Visual Voicemail messages 1 From the Visual Voicemail application tap the voicemail message you want to play 2 Tap J Play To delete Visual Voicemail messages 1 From the Visual Voicemail application tap the voicemail message you want to delete 2 Tap Bm Delete gt ok Voice Recorder The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately send it as a message 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt Samsung folder gt p Voice Recorder 2 Tap List to display a list of current recordings 3 Tap Recording quality to adjust the recording quality Choose from Normal Interview Conversation or Voice memo Tap Record to record an audio file Tap O Stop to stop recording The file automatically saves to the Voice list Tap Q Pause to pause the recording of an audio file Tap Cancel to cancel the recording of an audio file Tap Bookmark to bookmark the current recording Applications and Development 213 6 From the Recorded files page press I and then select one of the following Share via and se
269. n page 173 Edit Allows you to edit the name or URL of the bookmark For more information refer to Editing Bookmarks on page 172 Share via Allows you to share a URL address via Add to Dropbox Bluetooth ChatON Email Evernote Create Note Flipboard Gmail Google Hangouts Messages S Note Scrapbook or Wi Fi Direct Add shortcut to home Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to your phone s Home screen Set as homepage Sets the bookmark to your new homepage Adding Bookmarks 1 2 From the webpage tap gt Add bookmark Use the on screen keypad to enter the name of the bookmark and the URL Select a storage location for your new bookmark Update the title of the Bookmark and confirm the URL Tap Save The new save page now appears on the Bookmarks page Editing Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you want to edit Tap Edit Use the on screen keypad to edit the name of the bookmark or the URL Tap the Location field to assign a new folder location Tap Save or Cancel to exit the operation Deleting Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you want to delete 2 Tap Delete 3 Atthe confirmation window tap OK Emptying the Cookies A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during navigation In addition to containing some site specific information a cookie can also contain some personal information such as a
270. n screen for use with one hand Tutorial provides an on screen tutorial for the use of these one handed features functions Motions and Gestures Settings This feature allows you to assign specific functions to certain phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope Caution Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause unintended results To learn how to properly control motions tap ES Apps gt Settings gt Controls tab When tapped each entry comes with an on screen tutorial m From the Home screen press E and then tap Settings gt Controls tab Air gesture allows you to control your device by performing motions above the sensor without touching the device Air view displays helpful information when you hover your finger over the screen Air command allows you to activate or deactivate the Air comand function that apears on screen once you remove the S Pen from its internal slot Motions allows you to control your device using natural movements on the screen Palm motion allows you to control your device by touching the screen with your entire hand Smart screen allows you to control your device by using intelligent face detection features such as Smart stay Smart rotation Smart pause and Smart scroll Increase touch sensitivity allows you to increase the screen s touch sensitivity To activate Air gesture 1 From the main Settings page
271. n select any of the following menu options Add apps and widgets allows you to quickly access the Widget tab where you can then drag a selected widget to an available area on a selected screen Create folder allows you to create on screen folders to help organize files of application shortcuts Set wallpaper allows you to assign the current wallpaper for the Home screen Lock screen or Home and lock screens Choose from Gallery Live wallpapers or Wallpapers Edit page allows you to add or remove extended screens from your device You can have up to six extended screens one Home Screen and six Extended screens Settings provides quick access to the device s settings menu The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing IE and then tapping Settings Help displays the on screen Help application For more information refer to Help on page 168 Notification Bar The Notification area indicates new message events data sync status new messages calendar events call status etc You can expand this area to display the Notification screen that provides more detailed information about the current on screen notification icons 1 Touch the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 2 Tapa notification entry to open the associated application 2 B Clearing Notifications 1 In a single motion touch and drag the Statu
272. n use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing feature 1 From the keyboard touch the top of the screen and drag it down to display your notification panel 2 Tap Select input method gt Google voice typing 3 Atthe Listening prompt Speak now speak clearly and distinctly into the microphone The text is displayed in the message as you are speaking For more detailed information on configuring Google Voice Typing settings see Configure Google Voice Typing on page 286 4 Tap or Tap o Resume to resume recognition Done when you are finished Note The feature works best when you break your message down into smaller segments 74 Using Google Voice Typing 1 From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select 8 Select input method gt Google voice typing The virtual keyboard is then removed and all subsequent input to done via the microphone as text to speech Speak into the device s microphone and watch your text being entered on screen If the text is incorrect tap DELETE Using the Samsung Keyboard This QWERTY keyboard can be used to enter text in either a Portrait or landscape orientation The only difference between the two orientations are the sizes of the keys From a screen where you enter text rotate your phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation The on screen QWERTY keyboard
273. names to begin the connection process to these Wi Fi Direct compatible devices Note The target device must also have Wi Fi Direct service active and running before it can be detected by your device 5 Tap Done The direct connection is then established Confirm Q appears in the Status bar 6 When prompted to complete the connection the recipient should tap OK Your status field now reads Connected and your connected device is listed within the Wi Fi Direct devices listing Multimedia 135 7 Each partner including yourself must then tap Accept to consent to the new Wi Fi Direct pairing To enable Share shot on Camera 1 136 From the Home screen tap 6 Camera gt e re shot Quick Settings gt Share gt a Sha If you are prompted to activate your Wi Fi Direct connection tap OK and follow the activation procedures for Wi Fi Direct To configure your Share Shot options 1 Confirm the Share Shot viewfinder is active S3 appears at the top of the screen Tap lt Devices for sharing with to display list of current share shot participants Stop sharing images with select participants by tapping their entry and removing the green check mark Tap S3 Shooting modes to regain access to the Share menu Tap a Off to disable share shot while maintaining a Wi Fi Direct connection To take share shot images 1 2 Tap en Camera until the shutter sounds From the H
274. navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone It includes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your phone m From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt Settings From the Home screen press and then tap Settings For more information refer to Changing Your Settings on page 228 SketchBook for Galaxy This application allows you to explore your imagination through sketches using Autodesk SketchBook application and S Pen 1 From the Home screen tap ER Apps 9 Galaxy Plus folder gt EJ SketchBook for Galaxy 2 Follow the on screen tutorials Applications and Development 207 Story Album With Story Album you can create a digital Album of your story in media Special moments will be on a timeline and if you wish you can have your album published as a hard copy 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt ig Samsung folder gt ie Story Album 2 If prompted follow the on screen steps to install the full version of the application Read the introductory information and tap Next Tap Start to begin your Story Album Follow the on screen instructions Press and then tap Help for additional information gem 208 T Mobile My Account This application provides you online access to account information such as your current activity billing information service plans downloads and other information Note Wi Fi connection must
275. nd About services Help displays an on screen set of application related Help topics Applications and Development 211 Using Picture In Picture This feature can be used during playback of supported video types via either the Gallery Play Videos or Video player Note Some applications might not allow this video to remain active in the foreground ex Camera Camcorder screen This feature allows you to continue to view your video as a background operation while you multi task and do other things such as surf the Internet access your Contacts list look for a picture etc 1 From the Home screen tap ERES Apps 2 Tap the desired video playback application 3 Tap the desired video to begin playback Note The Picture In Picture feature only works when using the Video player application Other video players ex YouTube do not support this feature 212 4 As playback is initiated locate and tap Picture in Picture from the bottom right of the playback screen Your current video is then sent to foreground of any new page and most application Screens 5 The video disappears from the screen once it ends Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt s T Mobile folder gt Ey Visual Voicemail 2 Read the on scree
276. nd Corporate accounts via the device Contacts 91 Display Options The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose which contacts to display You can also choose to display only contacts that have phone numbers Note Once a display filter has been selected only those Contact entries are shown until the All contacts option is re selected 1 From the Home screen tap 3 2 Press and then tap Contacts to display Select any of the following to filter according to the selection All contacts allows you to display all available Contacts Device lists those Contacts currently found only on your Phone SIM lists those Contacts currently found only on your SIM card Samsung account lists those Contacts currently found and sync d within the Samsung account Google lists those Contacts currently found within the Google account Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync lists those Contacts currently found within the Exchange account 92 Customized list allows you to enable which account categories are displayed For example on Google contacts you can filter which Contact categories are shown Friends Family etc Additional Contact Options Sending an Email to a Contact Note Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can use the Send email feature 1 From the Home screen tap i 2 Press i and then tap Send message email gt Send email Contacts that contain an email address d
277. nd hold the mini picture frame to detach it and then place it in a desired location Multimedia 127 Camera and Camcorder Settings Metering allows you to set how the camera measures or This section describes the different settings that you can meters the light source Center weighted Matrix or Spot configure on your camera Not all of the following options are e S0 determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital available in both still camera and video camera modes The camera Choose from Auto 100 200 400 or 800 Use a available options vary by mode lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light a 1 From the viewfinder tap e 34 Quick Settings gt higher ISO number to take photos with less light or Auto to let Camera Settings the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots 2 The follow settings are located under the Camera Smart stabalization compensates for camera movement Camcorder and General tabs The settings that are displayed will depend on what camera mode you are in Camera Save as allows you to assign rich tone usage to an image Camcorder Video size Select a resolution for videos Use higher resolution for higher quality Higher resolution videos take up more Photo size Select a resolution for photos Use higher memory resolution for higher quality Higher resolution photos take up Video stabilization Activate or deactivate Optical Im
278. ne will know to turn the screen off to save power m From the main Call settings page tap Turn off screen during calls to create a check mark and enable the feature Call alerts 1 From the main Call settings page tap Call alerts 2 Tap Call vibrations to enable your phone to vibrate when the called party answers the phone Choose from Answer vibration or Call end vibration 3 Tap Call status tones to set the sound settings during a call then tap OK Choose from Call connect tone Minute minder and Call end tone 4 Tap Alerts on call to turn off alarm and message notifications during a call Incoming Call Notifictions When enabled shows notification pop ups for incoming voice calls when the screen is on m From the main Call settings page place a check mark in the Incoming call notifications field to activate the feature Accessory settings for call 1 From the main Call settings page tap Call accessories 2 The following options are available Automatic answering configures the device to automatically answer and incoming call when a headset is detected Automatic answering timer configures the time delay before the device automatically accepts the incoming call Outgoing call conditions allows you to make calls even when the device is locked Wi Fi Calling Wi Fi Calling is a free feature for T Mobile customers using this device with the new SIM card Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverag
279. ng entirely new versions collectively Update after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software related to security to improve such Software and ultimately enhance your user experience with your device This EULA applies to all and any component of the Update that Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software related to security unless we provide other terms along with such Update To use Software related to security provided through Update you must first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the Update After the Update you may no longer use the Warranty Information 345 Software that formed the basis for your Update eligibility The updated Software version may add new functions and in some limited cases may delete existing functions While the Update will be generally available in some limited circumstances the Software updates will only be offered by your network carrier and such Software updates will be governed by your contractual relationship with your network carrier With the Automatic Update function enabled as in the default setting in the System Update menu or Security menu in the Setting your device downloads some Updates automatically from time to time Given the importance of receiving Updates for security software in a timely manner to defend against new threats such Update may be automatically down
280. ns 34 Installing and Removing the SIM card 9 Screen Navigation 40 Installing the microSD Memory Card 11 OPEN EET 41 Installing the Battery 12 Using Motions and Gestures 47 Replacing the Battery Cover 12 Using the Multi Window 48 Charging the Battery 5 13 Menu Navigation 004 54 Extending Your Battery Life 15 Section 3 Call Functions and Switching the Device On or Off 16 Contacts List ees 56 Initial Device Configuration 16 Displaying Your Phone Number 56 Restarting the Device 17 Making a Call 00 ccc eee 56 Locking and Unlocking the Device 17 Ending a Call ccc eee 57 Voicemail 000 0c cece eee 17 Making Emergency Calls 58 Section 2 Understanding Your Device 19 Dialing Options cece eee eee 59 Features of Your Device 19 Answering a Call 045 60 Front VIGW iue duoc et ice dears err RS 21 Managing Reject Calls 60 Back View 000 e cece eee 23 International Calls 0005 61 Side VOWS sine dates od a Yon 24 Pause Dialing 0000000 eee 62 Wait Dialing lisse 62 Redialing the Last Number 63 Spe
281. ntained between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable medical device such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator to avoid potential interference with the device Persons who have such devices Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six 6 inches from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize the potential for interference Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your implantable medical device If you have any questions about using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device consult your health care provider For more information see http www fcc gov oet r safety rf fags html Health and Safety Information 333 Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical devices consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information Switch your mobile device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to extern
282. ntains all of your pictures and videos Remove both the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating the process Backing Up Media to your SD card You can back up your pictures videos documents and other media to your SD card 1 From the Home screen tap EHI Apps gt Samsung folder gt E My Files Select the folder where the files are that you would like to copy to the SD card This would include folders such as DCIM camera pictures and videos Pictures Music Playlists Download etc For example tap Apps gt Samsung folder gt ES My Files gt Images Press and then tap Select item Place checkmarks alongside those desired files Press f and then tap Copy gt SD memory card Go to the folder on your SD card where you would like to copy to files to For example Pictures Tap Paste here in the top right corner of the display The files are copied to the folder A Backing Up Internet Bookmarks to your Samsung Account You can back up your Internet bookmarks by using your Samsung account Only bookmarks you have added non default can be backed up 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Account Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap Add account and select Samsung account Sign in to your Samsung account or tap Create new account if you don t have one yet Follow the on screen instructions From the Home screen ta
283. numbers the card can store may differ 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed or Tap the Search field and begin entering the entry s name Matching entries are then displayed This process filters through all of your current account Contact entries to only show you the matching entries In a single motion touch and hold the letter tab area on the right until on screen letters appear then scroll through the list You are then taken to that section of the Contacts list Touch the contact entry Editing Contact Information 1 From the Home screen tap n0 2 Tapa contact name from the list and tap EZ Edit Select a contact name and press and then tap Edit Context Menu 3 Editthe contact information then Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry Adding a Number to an Existing Contact From the Home screen tap B 1 2 Touch and hold an entry and select Edit to reveal the Contact entry s details screen Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phone number e Tap to enteran additional phone number lt 2 Ej Google contact Mobile 9725555555 Email Home Alggmailcom Address Home 1234 Anywhere Drive Richardson Texas 75082 Events Contact Details Scree e Tap to remove a prev
284. o Dropbox Bluetooth ChatON Email Evernote Create Note Flipboard Gmail Google Google Hangouts Messages S Note Scrapbook or Wi Fi Direct Find on page allows you to search in the current page Incognito mode pages viewed in incognito mode won t appear within your browser history or search history and no traces such as cookies are left on your device For more information refer to Going Incognito on page 171 Desktop view allows you to assign the browser to display the current page in the desktop view to closely mimic the display as it would appear on a Desktop computer Brightness allows you to assign a brightness level specifically for the browser window This is independent of the brightness assigned within the device s Settings menu co Print provides print access on compatible Samsung printers Close this page only closes the current Internet application Settings allows you to change the way you view your web pages by changing these options For more information refer to Browser Settings on page 174 Applications and Development 169 Help allows you view additional information concerning the Internet application Entering a URL You can access a website quickly by entering the URL Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone To enter a URL and go to a particular website m From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the screen enter the URL and tap Go
285. o pop the end of the S Pen out of the device and gently pull it out Using the S Pen There are several different available functions Screen Shots Using S Pen To take a screen capture using the pen Note These steps allow you to take a capture of the entire screen contents 1 Grasp the pen and press the Pen button 2 Pressing the S Pen button then touch and hold the screen for 2 seconds takes a screen shot S Pen Input Using Handwriting 1 Remove the S Pen from its slot 2 Launch an application that contains an input area ex Messages Calculator Dailer Keypad etc 3 Hover the S Pen over a input area until E Handwriting Input appears then quickly tap the icon to reveal a new Handwriting Area Use this area to enter your input text or numbers and then have the device recognize that information Handwriting Input button ETFTETE VOVEPEVETT agam vmnan nnoufnnnm m mnambnm e 08 e ae Air Button The S Pen displays a menu via the Air Button interaction for different applicable contents 1 Remove the S Pen from its slot 2 Launch an application that contains an attachment or selection field such as Attachment button within Messages or Email provides a list of the most recently used Recipient selector within Messages or Email Enter message field within Messages Understanding Your Device 43 3 Press and hold the S Pen button to reveal some of your most used items contents
286. odes The available options vary by mode te Camera settings configure Camera settings 40 Flash activate or deactivate the flash ma Pe Night detection use this activate deactivate night L detection Qo Voice control activate or deactivate the voice control to OFF take photos SEM Recording mode select a resolution for videos Choose from Normal Limit for MMS Slow motion Fast motion or Smooth motion m m Tn Share functions activate or deactivate the sharing options Choose from Off Share Shot Buddy photo share ChatON phot share or Remote viewfinder Share shot Shooting mode lists the current shooting modes available from with the Share Shot mode Choose from Easy connect Wi Fi Direct or Cancel Quick Settings hide Quick settings Taking Dual Camera Photos With the Dual Camera feature you can take a picture with both the front and rear cameras at the same time To take a Dual Camera picture 1 From the camera viewfinder tap i Dual Camera located at the top left side of the screen The camera viewfinder displays an image from the front facing camera within a mini picture frame on top of the main image displayed from the rear facing camera 2 Tap a Camera until the shutter sounds To resize the front camera image m Touch and hold the mini picture frame until the resize handles appear then drag a corner to enlarge the image To reposition the front camera image m Touch a
287. of the media files from the folders and then open the Gallery Opening the Gallery m From the Home screen tap ERE Apps 2 Xe Gallery For more information refer to Camera Gallery Options on page 138 Note If you stored your files in folders directories on the storage card Gallery displays these folders as separate albums The top left album contains all the pictures in the storage card Viewing a Video within the Gallery 1 From the Home screen tap H Apps gt Ex Gallery 2 Locate your folder and video 3 Tap gt Play to playback your video For more information on using the Picture in Picture feature for video playback see Using Picture In Picture on page 212 AllShare Cast Hub This hardware allows you to enjoy what s currently on your device directly on your TV Note There is no need to be connected to a Wi Fi network or to be logged into your Samsung Account to use this feature AllShare Cast Hub establishes a WI Fi Direct connection between the device and the hub For more information about this device go to http www samsung com us mobile cell phones accessories EAD T10JDEGSTA Multimedia 143 Connecting AllShare Cast Hub To connect your AllShare Cast Hub hardware This feature functions with an external AllShareCast Hub to fully mirror what is currently displayed on your device to the external TV Screen Mirroring with Hub accessory 1 Connect the AllShare Cast Hub to a po
288. of the following conditions Heart disease Asthma or lung disease Diabetes or liver or kidney disease Arthritis You should also check with your doctor if you have symptoms suggestive of heart lung or other serious disease such as Pain or discomfort in your chest neck jaw or arms during physical activity Dizziness or loss of consciousness Shortness of breath with mild exertion or at rest or when lying down or going to bed Ankle swelling especially at night A heart murmur or a rapid or pronounced heartbeat Muscle pain when walking upstairs or up a hill that goes away when you rest Applications and Development 195 Finally the American College of Sports Medicine recommends that you see your doctor before engaging in vigorous exercise if two or more of the following apply You are a man older than age 45 or a woman older than age 55 You have a family history of heart disease before age 55 You smoke or quit smoking in the past six months You have not exercised for three months or more You are overweight or obese You have high blood pressure or high cholesterol You have impaired glucose tolerance also called pre diabetes When in Doubt Check it Out If you are unsure of your health status have several health problems or are pregnant you should speak with your doctor before starting a new exercise program Working with your doctor ahead of time is a good way to p
289. oice typing input method to convert your spoken words to on screen text or Touch and hold _ to select from other input methods such as Voice to text to launch the device s Google Voice typing application to covert spoken words into on screen text Handwriting to launch an on screen handwriting area that can be used to convert on screen patterns text to text e Clipboard to launch the device s clipboard area from where you can select a current clipboard item to place in your current message Settings to access the Samsung keyboard settings menu Emoticons to access a variety of emoticon pages Keyboard alignment to detach the on screen keyboard so that you can manually dock it anywhere on the current text entry screen Selecting the feature again redocks the keyboard into its original location using the original size Changing the Text Input Mode in Keyboard 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard With Samsung keyboard as your text entry method select one of the following text mode options Abc ABC to use alphabetic characters from the on screen keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays Sym Symbol Numeric Sym to enter numbers by pressing the numbers selecting them on the on screen keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays ABC There are up to 2 available pages of numeric symbols available by tapping EA
290. ol the sounds on the device as well as configure the sound settings m From the Home screen press el and then tap Settings gt Device tab gt Sound The following options display Silent mode via Device Options Screen Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from making noise in a theater for example In Silent Mode the speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of incoming calls or other functions that normally have a defined tone or sound as an alert 1 From the Home screen press and hold emm Power End until the Device options screen displays 2 Tap either Mute Vibrate or Sound from the Device options screen to activate or deactivate these features the current mode displays 258 Adjusting the Volume Settings The Volume menu now provides access to various volume settings within one on screen popup menu 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Sound gt Volume 2 Touch and drag the on screen slider to assign the volume settings for any of the following volume levels Music video games and other media Ringtone Notifications or System 3 Tap OKto assign the volume levels Vibration intensity Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the vibration is for different options 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Sound gt Vibration intensity 2 Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration intensity for Incoming call Notification and Hap
291. ome Screen tap ERES Apps gt Dad Gallery to locate your newly shot images located in their default storage location External users will be able to locate their images in either a downloaded or RECV received folder Confirm oi Share shot images delivered received appears in the Notifications area of the screen Using S Beam to Share Pictures This feature when activated via NFC allows you to beam large files directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact These files can be larger such as Videos HD pictures and other large files You can beam images and videos from your gallery music files from your music player and more 1 2 Important Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying From the main Settings page tap Connections tab If not already active in a single motion touch and slide the NFC slider to the right to turn it on Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on If not already active in a single motion touch and slide the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on On the source device containing the desired image or video tap Apps gt PX Gallery Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the preview window the Lock screen They must both be active and unlocked It is recommended that the target device be on the Home screen 7 Placethe two active NFC enabled devices back to back to begin Note If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the
292. on between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Smart Practices While Driving On the Road Off the Phone The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his or her vehicle Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be performed while driving whether it be eating drinking talking to passengers or talking on a mobile phone unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes impaired Samsung is committed to promotin
293. on entries and numbers Changing Your Settings 273 274 Setup call rejection messages allows you to manage both existing rejection messages and create new ones Answering ending calls allows you to manage the settings for answering and ending calls The home key answers calls allows you to press Sl to answer the phone Voice control allows you to answer incoming voice calls using Voice The power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the current call Turn off screen during calls allows you to force the screen to turn off during an active call Call alerts allows you to assign call alert tones and activate call alerts and vibration Call vibrations vibrates the phone when the called party answers Choose from Answer vibration or Call end vibration Call status tones assigns sounds settings during the call Choose from Call connect tone Minute minder and Call end tone Alerts on call selects whether alarm and message notification is turned off during a call Incoming call notifications when enabled shows notification pop ups for incoming voice calls when the screen is on Call accessories allows you to assign headset settings during incoming calls Automatic answering configures the device to automatically answer and incoming call when a headset is detected Automatic answering timer configures the time delay before the device automatically accepts the
294. oogle or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Note When storing an entry into your micro SIM card note that only the Name and Number are saved To save additional information for a particular contact such as notes email dates etc it is important to save that Contact into your phone s onboard memory 1 From the Home screen tap BB Contacts Note The label entries below can change and are dependant 2 Tap tocreate a contact on the selected destination type ex the Other and Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync Note You can also add a new contact by entering a number an account destination type from the keypad and pressing and then tap gt 7 i i A Ada to contacts a Greate conte Konting with Step 3 6 Tap the label button to the left of the Phone field and 3 Tap a destination type Device SIM Samsung account scroll through the list to select a category such as Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync depending Mobile Home Work Work Fax Home Fax Pager Other on where you want to save the new contact Custom or Callback information 7 Tapa phone number field and enter a phone number Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phone number 4 Tap the Name field and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad e Tap v to access additional name entries such as Name e Tap to enter an additional phone number prefix First name Middle name
295. or tap Cancel to ignore any changes Set as allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo Home screen Lock screen or Home and lock screens Details files details such as Title Time Width Height rientation File Size and Path Settings provides access to the Gallery options menu Choose from SNS data management Sync only via Wi Fi Tags Tag buddy or Face tag and Sound amp shot Auto play sound Video viewing options e c ce Note If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the picture tap anywhere on the screen to display them 1 Tapa video to select it 2 Tap to play the video Share via lt i allows you to share the video via ChatON Add to Dropbox Bluetooth Email Evernote Create Note Gmail Google Messages Picasa S Note Scrapbook Wi Fi Direct or YouTube Trim ES activates the Trim feature so that you can edit the length of the current video Delete T allows you to delete the current video Choose either OK or Cancel 3 Press for additional options Using the Camcorder In addition to taking photos the camera also doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record view and send high definition videos Shooting Video Tip When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions it is recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by having the light source behind you Multimedia 131 Not
296. or text strings 4 Make a selection Air Command Toolbar Once removed from its slot S Pen shows an on screen Air Command button toolbar that allows you to quickly activate frequently used applications or actions Scrap booker Action Memo Screen Write y E L S Finder J Pen Window Air command S Pen Using Action Memo 1 Remove the S Pen from its slot Hover over the screen and press the S Pen button 44 2 From the Air Command menu select fl Action Memo 3 Use the on screen pop up page to enter in text and DUDAS 4 Select 25 Select content circle the action memo content and from the application toolbar select an available application such as Contacts 5 The new content is then copied into your selected application Action Memo Toolbar Application Toolbar lalslalrlolnli ikli Ph z xhc v bin miae LE e 5 S Pen Using Smart Clip Instantly outline and crop images displayed on the screen in any shape to share or paste with Smart Clip Once desired image is selected users can freely edit the cropped content or personalize with their own handwriting To take a selective screen capture Note Additional options are available by scrolling left across the bottom of the screen 4 Select a destination for the newly captured image from the bottom of the screen Tap one of the following options Scrapbook creates a scrapbook folder in your Note These steps allow yo
297. orporate Servers Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between your device and the remote exchange server Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries between your device and the remote exchange server Sync Task synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between your device and the remote exchange server Exchange server settings provides access to the Domain user name Password and Exchange server settings Press 5 to return to the previous page Messages 121 Section 7 Multimedia This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your device including the Camera Camcorder Music Player Samsung Link and how to manage your photos images and sounds You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built in camera functionality Your camera produces photos in JPEG format Important Do not take photos of people without their permission Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with another person s privacy Note An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video since there is already built in storage Note Using an older or slow microSD card can affect camera performance especially for video recording 122 Assigning the Default Storage Location Important Too many users can overlook this storage location until something goes wrong It is recommended that you verify this location
298. ose a repeat option Otherwise playback stops only if you Stop it even when you switch applications Note If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the Music application the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the screen 190 Displaying the Now Playing Screen If you navigate away from the Now playing screen to return to the Now playing screen from other Music screens m Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing bar or In a single motion touch and drag QD Music notification icon down from the Status bar and tap the song title from the Notifications area You can also pause and resume playback and skip to the next song in the panel For more information refer to Notification Bar on page 33 Play Store Formerly known as the Android Market this application provides access to downloadable applications and games to install on your phone The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application or flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account Accessing the Play Store 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt gt Play Store 2 Tap Existing and enter your Google account information 3 Tap OK to agree to the Play Store terms of service 4 Follow the on screen instructions to complete your setup Downloading a New Google Application To download a new application you will n
299. ostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset Do not store or carry flammable liquids gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the mobile device its parts or accessories Health and Safety Information 337 For vehicles equipped with an air bag remember that an air bag inflates with great force Do not place objects including installed or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates serious injury could result Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft The use of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the aircraft s operation Check with appropriate authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial of cell phone services to the offender or legal action or both While using your device leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing games for extended periods If you feel any discomfort stop using the device immediately 338 Reduce risk of r
300. ou can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat Share things such as pictures videos audio Contacts Calendar entries and Location information Important The Samsung account manages the access information username password to several applications such as Samsung Link ChatON and Samsung Hub For more information visit https web samsungchaton com Applications and Development 153 Registering with the Service 1 Note If you opt to receive the verification code via SMS this Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt Chaton If prompted to connect via a mobile network tap Connect Select either the Terms and conditions or Privacy policy and read the on screen information Tap Accept to continue Select a country code enter your current phone number to register with the service and tap Register Choose to receive the verification code via either SMS text message or Voice answering machine call to your device information is sent directly to your device Once received the Verification field is automatically filled in 7 Enter your name and tap Done 154 10 Review the Terms and conditions and tap Accept to continue Tap Sign in to log into your Samsung account or Tap Not now to continue without logging in Adding Your First Chat On Buddy 1 4 Note From the ChatON application screen tap lt 2 Add bu
301. our source device tap Share video select the desired video file gt Done 5 As the video begins to play all connected users must tap the Share video option within their Group Play Note Without users tapping the Share video option the Sharing slider will de disabled and you will only be able to display the video on your device 6 Atthe source device drag the enabled Split screen slider from a single screen session P to the Multi Screen setting GEJA to span videos across multiple devices 7 Use the on screen number on each participant s screen to align the devices accordingly and display the same video over several different screens Using Group Play to Simultaneously Share Music 1 Connectto an active Wireless Access Point and confirm your connection is this same Wi Fi as the group leader 2 From within the Group Play application tap Create group If previously selected enter your group password and tap OK 3 Before continuing have all users launch their respective Group Play application and connect to your new group 4 On your source device tap Share music select the desired file Done 5 As the song begins to play all connected users must tap the Share music option within their Group Play Hangouts Previously known as Google Talk is an updated place to hangout share photos and even video calls This is a free web based application for instant messaging offered by Google Conversation logs are a
302. ow or Try it FREE 3 Follow the on screen log in screens 4 Return to the Library screen from most other screens in the Music application by tapping the Music application icon aD Music notification icon at the top left of the Application bar Searching for Music in Your Library 1 2 From within the Play Music application tap Search to search through your available songs Type the name of an artist album song or playlist Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box Tap a matching song to play it tap a matching album artist or playlist to view a list of its songs Tab Options There are various options available from the various tabs From within the My Library area select one of the following tabs and tap H to access an available option GENRES Add to queue ARTISTS Start instant mix or Shop for artist Applications and Development 189 ALBUMS Start instant mix Add to queue Keep on device Add 1o playlist Go to artist or Shop for artist SONGS Start instant mix Add to queue Add to playlist Go to artist Go to album Delete or Shop this artist Playing Music m From within the Play Music application tap a song in your library to listen to it The Now playing screen opens and the song you touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts to play The tracks in the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list unless you cho
303. p EHI Apps gt Samsung folder gt Internet From the webpage tap Bookmarks Press and then tap Move to folder Place a checkmark on those Bookmarks you want to back up then tap Done Select a location or folder The Bookmarks that you moved are now listed under the Samsung account heading in your Bookmark list Changing Your Settings 301 When you get a new phone update your software or reset your device sign in to your Samsung account and the backed up bookmarks will be displayed on your Bookmarks page under the Samsung account heading Backing Up Settings to Google You can use your Google account to back up apps Wi Fi passwords and other data Note These procedures should be initiated before you set up 1 your Gmial account on the device From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt 55 Google folder gt 2 Gmail Tap Existing if you have a Google account The Inbox loads conversations and email or Tap New if you do not have a Google account Confirm that immediately after signing in to your Google account the Google services screen is displayed From within the Google services screen tap the checkbox within the Backup area 302 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Backup and reset Tap Back up my data to create a checkmark This will back up your app data Wi Fi passwords and other settings Your Google account should be l
304. pause This is indicated in the number string as a comma mu 1 From the Home screen tap and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add 2 sec pause This feature adds an automatic two second pause 3 Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be dialed automatically after the second pause Tip You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering multiple 2 second pauses 4 Tap EU 62 Wait Dialing Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the phone waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with the next sequence of numbers Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping Yes This is indicated in the number string as a semicolon Note Do not add multiple Waits to a number string as this will continue to prompt you after each sequence 1 From the Home screen tap and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add wait This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits 3 Tap E 4 Once prompted to Send the following tones tap Yes to dial the remaining digits Redialing the Last Number The device stores the numbers of the calls you ve dialed received or missed if the caller is identified To recall any of these numbers 1 From the Home Screen tap 3 2 Tapthe Logs tab to display the list of recent calls 3 Tap the name n
305. perating within 5 15 5 25 GHz may only be used indoors not outside in order to avoid interference with Mobile Satellite Services MSS Therefore this device is restricted from being used outdoors when operating in frequencies between 5 15 5 25 GHz This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using your phone The terms mobile device or cell phone are used in this section to refer to your phone Read this information before using your mobile device Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals The U S Food and Drug Administration FDA has published information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency RF exposure from wireless phones The FDA publication includes the following information Do cell phones pose a health hazard Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause cancer or other serious health hazards The weight of scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency RF energy Over the past 15 years scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell phones While some researchers have reported biological changes associated with RF energy these studies have failed to be replicated The majority of studies published have failed to show an association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health problems The low levels of RF
306. plications display in the applications list and are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set to Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list or atthe end of the list if View type is set to Customizable grid Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details Launching an Installed Google Application 1 From the Home screen tap BT Apps 2 Tap the newly installed application This application is typically located on the last Applications page Unknown sources This feature can be used for Android application development The feature allows developers to install non Play Store applications m From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Security Unknown sources Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is active Note If Unknown sources is disabled those applications without a certificate will not be allowed to download to your device Manage applications This feature allows you to manage and remove installed applications You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your device and clear the data cache or defaults m From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Application manager Clearing application cache and data 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Application manager 2 Tapan application in which to clear
307. porate email server system and provides access to email contact and calendar synchronization 112 Creating an Internet Email Account From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt Gy Email If you already have other email account setup e Open an existing email account press eT and then tap Settings 3 Add account or Enter your Email address and Password information Email address your Internet email address Password typically your network access password case sensitive Tap Show password to display the password as you enter it in the associated field Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually POP3 or IMAP Follow the on screen prompts and enter the information specific to your email provider Tap Send email from this account by default to assign this email account as your default account for all outgoing emails Tap Next 5 Atthe Account options screen select the frequency which the device should check for new email on the server and tap Next Important The Sync Email feature must be enabled to allow synching between your device and the remote Server Tap the Notify me when email arrives field to receive new email notifications Tap the Automatically download attachments when connected to Wi Fi field to assist with faster access to large email attachments when using Wi Fi 6 Atthe Setup email screen name the account and enter a screen name to identify
308. portant The computer application must be installed on the computer containing the desired files This computer must have an active Internet connection Note It might be necessary to configure your router s firewall settings to allow this application to gain access to the Internet Applications and Development 159 Accessing Dropbox on your Device 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt KJ Galaxy Plus folder gt E Dropbox gt Start 2 Tap Signin enter your current account credentials and tap Sign in or Tap Sign up for Dropbox and follow the on screen instructions to register for a new account 3 Follow the on screen instructions 4 Initially you will need to configure your Camera Upload parameters Choose from Wi Fi only or Wi Fi or data plan Tap Turn on Camera Upload after making your selection Caution Enabling this feature can incur data charges depending on your plan if the Wi Fi or data plan is selected 160 5 Tap Access Dropbox at the top of the application window to access the files and folders you area currently sharing from your computer Manually uploading a Picture to Dropbox 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Camera 2 After the image is taken tap the Image Viewer box at the bottom right This previews the current image 3 Tap the image to reveal the image options at the top of the screen 4 Tap gt EJ Add to Dropbox select a folder location and tap Add
309. pplications and services that require your consent to their separate terms and conditions and privacy policies You expressly acknowledge and agree that your use of such applications and services will be subject to the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies 13 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS OMISSIONS INTERRUPTIONS DEFECTS DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION COMPUTER VIRUS FAILURE TO CONNECT NETWORK CHARGES IN APP PURCHASES AND ALL OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES S0 THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES DAMAGES CAUSES OF ACTION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT
310. pplied to the device to improve the overall security Software Update The Software Update feature enables you to use your device to connect to the network and upload any new software directly to your device The device automatically updates with the latest available software when you access this option The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance Displays when the Software updated feature is active Displays when the Software update feature is in progress 314 To update your device 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Eo General tab gt About device gt Software update 2 Readthe Software update information screen 3 Select an available option Note You configure the device s software update parameters Cancel Tap this option to cancel the operation Wi Fi settings Enable this option to only download available updates via an active Wi Fi connection If disabled the device will begin available downloads via its T Mobile connection OK Tap this option to connect to the remote server detect if there is an available update the begin the download over your existing data connection Software updates can include bug fixes enhancements to services to the device or currently installed software Section 11 Health and Safety Information This device is capable of operating in Wi Fi mode in the 2 4 and 5 GHz bands The FCC requires that devices o
311. r application Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in progress Displays when a file or application download is in progress Displays when the Share shot option is enabled from within the Camera Shooting mode menu and images and being shared via Wi Fi Direct For more information referto Camera Options on page 124 Displays when a screen capture has been taken and stored in the clipboard For more information refer to Using Motions and Gestures on page 47 Displays when your device is connected being used to control streaming media and is connected to a Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA certified devices Displays when your device is currently sharing streaming media to paired device using the Samsung Link application Displays when AllShare Cast Hub is active connected to your device and communicating For more information referto AllShare Cast Hub on page 143 Displays when updates are available for download Displays when a Play Store download has completed Displays when Hangout updates are available for download Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Displays when Wi Fi Direct is communicating with another compatible device 60 WY Y gt amp amp Displays to alert you to disable an active Wi Fi Direct connection if not in use
312. re you are a resident Notwithstanding the foregoing Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies or an equivalent type of urgent legal relief in any jurisdiction b United States residents ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with any other person s or entity s claim or dispute and specifically without limitation of the foregoing shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class Warranty Information 349 action The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator whose award may not exceed in form or amount the relief allowed by the applicable law The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act The laws of the State of Texas without reference to its choice of laws principles shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the EULA For any arbitration in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees are 5 000 00 or less Small Cl
313. reen power saving allows you to lower the screen power level Tum off haptic feedback allows you to tum off vibration when you tap or touch the screen 4 Tap Learn about Power saving to learn about various ways to conserve battery power 308 When the power gets low confirm appears at the top of the screen This indicates the power saving mode is active SD Card amp Device Storage From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 4GB microSDHC memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 32GB microSDXC memory card types can include capacities greater than 32GB To view the memory allocation for your external SD card m From the Home screen press E and then tap Settings gt General tab Storage The available memory displays under the Total space and SD card headings Important DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or transferring files Doing so will result in loss or damage of data Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD card Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs out while you are using the microSD card Mounting the SD Card To store photos music videos and other applications You must mount install the SD card prior to use Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer 1 From the main
314. refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 297 2 Log into your external cloud storage solution In our case we are using a Dropbox account For more information refer to Dropbox on page 159 3 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Cloud 4 Confirm your Samsung account appears at the top of the screen 5 Tap Storage usage to display an overview of your total used space 298 6 Tap Sync settings select which device parameters will be synched and tap Sync now Choose from Sync Calendar Sync Contacts Sync Internet and Sync Scrapbook 7 Tap Backup or Restore to launch the feature Backup manually loads up the currently selected categories and backs up the data to your cloud storage location Tap Backup to begin the manual backup process Restore allows you to retrieve your previously backed up data from your Samsung account and then download it to your device 8 Tap Link Dropbox account Allow to now link your active Dropbox account Backup and Reset Location settings backup configurations or reset the phone to erase all personal data m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt General tab gt Backup and reset Mobile Backup and Restore The device can be configured to back up your current settings application data and settings 1 From the main Settings page tap Accounts tab gt Backup and reset Tap Back up my data to create a ba
315. remains on e Low Battery or Charging Error red blinks animates Missed Notification Call or Messaging blue blinks animates For more information refer to LED Indicator on page 262 Menu key displays a list of options available for the current screen From the Home screen it displays Add apps and widgets Create folder Set wallpaper Edit page Settings and Help options Home key displays the Home screen when pressed Press and hold to display your recent apps Task manager and Remove all option From the Idle screen press Home to display the My Magazine application Double press to activate S Voice Microphones are used during phone calls and allow other callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them There are two microphones on the device Bottom microphone used during handset mode Top microphone used while an active call is in the Speakerphone mode and assists in noise cancellation 2 microphone solution Understanding Your Device 21 22 10 USB Power Accessory connector allows you to connect a power cable or optional accessories such as a USB data cable Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries Display shows all the information needed to operate your phone such as the connection status received signal strength phone battery level and time Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while facing the screen and allows you to video conference Gestures Sen
316. rent application on the screen When launching applications that contain multimedia view to display additional functions files music video audio from both files will be played or simultaneously Using two fingers touch and drag the Status bar downwards to display additional functions 3 Tap the Multi window entry to activate the feature 2 The icon turns green when active Note Although the Multi window feature is now active as shown via the Notifications screen the user must enable display the Multi window list is shown only by using the Back button This action is a one time event during the initial access After that the Multi window list is displayed whenever the feature in active via the Notifications screen 48 To display the Multi window tab 1 Press and hold the Back key The Multi window tab appears by default on the left side of the screen Note Initially open activation the entire apps panel is briefly displayed then minimized to only show the tab 2 Tapthe tab to open the application panel showing all the available Multi window apps To activate Multi window via the Settings menu 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings Device tab Multi window 2 Verify feature is active indicated by REN 3 Press GM to return to the Home screen and then tap you open the application panel showing all the available Multi window apps To hide the Multi window tab
317. rity options Such as Encrypt all Sign all Create keys Private keys Public keys and Set default key These security policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers Number of emails to load allows you to select the number of on screen emails to keep loaded on the screen by default Auto download attachments allows the device to automatically download email attachments when an active Wi Fi connection is detected This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G LTE network connection Auto resend times enables the device to resend an outgoing email a specified number of times if delivery fails Incoming settings lets you specify incoming email settings such as Email address Username Password IMAP server Security type Port and IMAP path prefix Outgoing settings lets you specify outgoing email settings Such as SMTP server Security type Port Require sign in User name or Password Note Some the above options may not be displayed when using some Internet account types Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook Your device also provides access to your company s Outlook Exchange server If your company uses either Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007 you can use this email application to wirelessly synchronize your email Contacts and Calendar information directly with your company s Exchange server Setting Up a Microsoft Exch
318. roduct for many years Health and Safety Information 329 Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from Liquids of any kind Keep the mobile device dry Precipitation humidity and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits If the mobile device does get wet do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven microwave or dryer because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device Extreme heat or cold Avoid temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 45 C 113 F Microwaves Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven Doing so may cause a fire or explosion Dust and dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust dirt or sand Cleaning solutions Do not use harsh chemicals cleaning solvents or strong detergents to clean the mobile device Wipe it with a soft 330 cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap and water solution If the mobile device has a retractable camera lens do not use soap and water to clean the lens Use a blower or brush or lens cleaning paper dampened in a lens cleaning solution Shock or vibration Do not drop knock or shake the mobile device Rough handling can break internal circuit boards Paint Do not paint the mobile device Paint can clog the device s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation
319. rred TTS engine from the list of available options The default is the Samsung text to speech engine option 3 Tap E next to the preferred TTS engine configure the following settings Language allows you to set the language for spoken text Settings for Samsung text to speech engine allows you to configure the General settings for the Samsung TTS Install voice data allows you to install voice data for speech synthesis 4 Configure the General options to alter the settings associated with this feature Speech rate adjusts the rate at which on screen text is spoken by the device Changing Your Settings 287 Listen to an example plays a short example of what the text to speech feature sounds like on your device when activated Configuring the Mouse TrackPad This feature allows you to configure the pointer speed for a connected mouse or trackpad 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab gt Language and input Pointer speed 2 Adjustthe slider and tap OK 288 Voice Control The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice commands to control your device 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Controls tab gt Voice control 2 Verify the feature is active by tapping aJ atthe top of your screen to activate Voice control 3 The following options are available Tap an option to create a checkmark and activate the feature Incoming calls allows you to answer or reject calls
320. rrent entries Then tap Done Tap Save to store the newly created group Note Some externally maintained group types such as Google can only be managed or updated remotely online vs via the device These external types will not allow editing or deleting members locally via the phone Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group 1 3 From the Groups tab tap a group entry gt Add group member From the available list of contacts tap the contact s you want to add A check mark displays next to contact entry Tap Done The selected contacts are added to the group Removing an Entry From a Caller Group 1 2 3 4 From the Groups tab tap a group entry Press and then tap Remove member Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group A check mark displays next to contact entry Tap Done The contacts are removed from the group Editing a Caller Group To edit a Group entry there must be at least one member as part of the selected group 1 From the Groups tab touch and hold a group entry then select Edit group Make modifications to the Group name Group ringtone Message alert Vibration pattern fields or Add member Tap Save Deleting a Caller Group 1 From the Groups tab press I and then tap Delete groups Select either Select all or tap the desired group Tap Delete Select either the Group only or Group and group members 5 Tap OK Sending a Me
321. s on the SD card are copied to your phone Backing Up Media to your PC You can back up your pictures videos documents and other media to your PC You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and copy files back and forth between your phone and PC If you insert an SD card in the device you can also access the files directory from the SD card by using your device as a memory card reader 1 3 300 Connect the USB cable to your device then connect the cable to your PC USB port After a few seconds a pop up window displays on the PC when it is connected with your device On the PC pop up click Open device to view files Verify your device appears as a removable disk on your PC Once connected you can access the Phone folder internal phone memory and the Card folder SD card Select the location where the files are that you would like to copy to your PC Phone or Card Select the folders where the information is kept This would include folders such as DCIM camera pictures and videos Pictures Music Playlists Download etc Select the files that you want to copy and copy them Control C copy to a folder on your PC Control V paste Disconnect the USB cable from your phone and the PC To copy files on your PC back to your phone simply reverse the procedure Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt ES Gallery Verify the Gallery co
322. s same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Important The Mobile HotSpot service cannot be active when device is connected to Wi Fi Please disconnect your Wi Fi connection prior to active this service Note You must have a tethering plan on your account in order to use the Mobile HotSpot You cannot use data on the device while using Mobile HotSpot To activate the Mobile HotSpot service 1 From the Home screen tap HR Apps gt i T Mobile folder gt Mobile HotSpot or From the Home screen press eil and then tap Settings gt M Connections tab Tethering and Mobile HotSpot 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Mobile HotSpot slider to the right to turn it on 3 Edit the Network SSID name and then write it down 4 Enable the Broadcast network name SSID field if you would like to broadcast your SSID name to nearby devices 5 Verify the Security field is set to WPA2 PSK 6 Enter a new password then write it down Additional options include SHow password and Show advanced options 7 Tap Save to store the new settings 8 Confirm the Mobile HotSpot active icon at the top of the screen appears Connections 225 Note By default the connection is not secured Note Using your Mobile HotSpot drains your device s battery much faster The best way to keep using the device as a HotSpot is by connecting to a Charger To connect to th
323. s 247 Enabling My Places 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Location services 2 Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite locations More Networks This tab displays additional wireless and network information m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt MSIE Connections tab gt More networks Mobile networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Mobile networks options m From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks Mobile networks 248 The following options display Use mobile data Allows you to activate mobile data usage on your device m From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks Mobile networks Mobile data Data Roaming Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks Mobile networks 2 Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while roaming outside your network or Tap Data roaming again to remove the green check mark and deactivate the feature Access Point Names To access a wireless access point m From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Access Point Names A list of the Access point names
324. s 251 VPN Client 215 W Wait 62 Wait dialing 62 Wallpaper Assign Home 32 Home and Lock Screens 39 Wallpapers Assigning from Gallery 131 Changing Home Screen 38 Changing Lock Screen 39 Changing via Settings Menu 39 Managing 38 Warranty Information 339 WatchON 216 Adding a New Room 220 Changing Channels 218 Configure Just For You 219 Customizing Your Remote 216 Initial Configuration 216 Locating Programs 218 Personalize 219 Settings 219 Using 218 Web 168 History 173 Widget Adding Widgets 32 Widgets Adding and Removing 37 Moving to a Different Screen 38 Settings 207 Stopwatch 158 Wi Fi About 229 Activating 229 Calling 252 Connecting to 230 Deactivating 230 Direct Connection 235 During Sleep 232 MAC Address 233 Manually Adding Network 233 Off 230 On 135 229 Settings 229 230 Show Usage 246 Sorting Entries 231 Status icons 230 Wi Fi Calling 10 Activating 252 253 Connection Preferences 254 Icons 255 Launching 254 Settings 253 Wi Fi Direct 235 Activate and Connect 235 Device Name 17 On 135 235 World Clock DST Settings 158 WPA2 PSK 225 226 242 243 WPS PIN Pairing 234 WPS Push Button Connect 234 Pairing 234 Y YouTube High Quality 221 Settings 220 369
325. s Mobile networks 2 Tap Network operators The current network connection displays at the bottom of the list Important You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an available network 3 Tap Search now to manually search for a network 4 Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network connection Note Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Default Setup Options Your phone default is set to Automatic to automatically search for an available network You can set this option to Manual to select a network each time you connect 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network operators 2 Tap Default setup 3 Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a network or Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually VPN settings The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual Private Networks VPNs Note Before using VPN you must first set up a screen unlock PIN or password For more information refer to Security on page 310 Adding a VPN Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to use PPTP L2TP IPSec PSK L2TP IPSec RSA IPSec Xauth PSK IPSec Xauth RSA IPSec Hybrid RSA Important Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt VPN 2 If prompted
326. s bar down to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 2 Tap Clear The notifications are cleared from the panel Accessing Additional Screen Functions In addition to notifications this screen also provides quick and ready access to device functions These can be quickly activated or deactivated Scrolling across a horizontal list of functions has been enhanced with an accessible Grid view Note You can select the function buttons you see at the top of the Notifications panel Only 5 buttons are shown at any one time The Grid view is the only way to view all functions Understanding Your Device 33 To activate the Grid view m From the Notification panel tap EH Open Grid view to display additional functions or Using two fingers touch and drag the Status bar downwards to display additional functions To minimize the Grid view m From the Notification panel tap B Close Grid view to show only your primary functions To customize the functions displayed 1 From the Notification screen tap EH Open Grid view to display additional functions 2 Tap ra Edit then locate the Notifications panel area located at the bottom of the Notifications panel screen 3 Inasingle motion touch and hold a desired function then drag it to the top row 34 Customizing the Screens You can customize the Home screens panels to display the Widgets Shortcuts Folders or Wallpapers For example one screen could
327. s the NFC near Field Communication feature found on your device to transmit large files directly to another compatible device by direct touch This method of image transfer requires NFC and S Beam to be enabled prior to use For more information refer to Using S Beam to Share Pictures on page 137 Enabling Share Shot Share shot is a Wi Fi Direct group sharing feature where multiple users can Wi Fi connect their devices and then all share each others pictures in real time This is really useful in group events ex family gathering or company party where you don t want to have to email everyone later and make sure you all can share your pics at a later date For more information refer to Wi Fi Direct Setup and Settings on page 235 The general process is Enable Wi Fi Direct communication Pair your device with other users Enable Share shot To enable Wi Fi Direct Important The target device must already be connected to the same Wi Fi and have its Wi Fi Direct feature active and scanning before you can your pairing 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status 3 Tap Wi Fi Direct Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin the connection process to another Wi Fi Direct compatible device or Tap Multi connect gt Scan and select all the device
328. s to your Contacts List is your device s built in memory If existing Google and Corporate email accounts have been synchronized to your phone these will be made available to your device during the creation of new entries These new Contacts entries can be assigned or saved to synced accounts such as Phone SIM Google or Corporate Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically You can create either a Device SIM Samsung account Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync contact Important The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account types are only visible after creating an email account of those types on your phone Device contacts are stored locally on the device Vote If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters contacts stored on the phone can be lost SIM contacts are stored within the micro SIM Card 80 Note SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry Samsung account contacts are shared with your existing Samsung account e Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail account Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync also known as Work or Outlook contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft Outlook Add new account lets you create a new account type Choose from Samsung account G
329. search for visible external Bluetooth compatible devices such as headsets devices printers and computers Important Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to confirm and pair with them 3 Enter a PIN to pair with the device if one is required and tap OK Scanning for Received Files This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you can pair with them 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page press and then tap Received files Pairing Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted connections between your device and another Bluetooth device When you pair devices they share a passkey allowing for fast secure connections while bypassing the discovery and authentication process Note Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one time process Once pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode To pair your device with another Bluetooth device 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap the Visibility field shown by the device name Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an external device This is shown by a green check mark 3 Tap Scan Your device displays a list of discovered in range Bluetooth devices 4 Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing 5 Enter the passkey or PIN cod
330. ser visible pattern field you will draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to unlock the phone s buttons or touch screen When you activate the User tactile feedback field you feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern The feature is now paired with a backup PIN code that acts as a backup to the pattern lock If you forget your pattern you can regain access to the device by entering a PIN code Note Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Lock Screen 2 Tap Screen lock gt Pattern 3 Draw your pattern by touching your first on screen point Then without removing your finger from the screen drag your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green circle Changing Your Settings 265 4 When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical horizontal or diagonal direction lift your finger from the screen and tap Continue 5 Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping Confirm The Unlock pattern is set Enter the backup PIN code and tap Continue 7 Reenter the PIN to reconfirm the previous entry and tap OK Changing the Screen Lock Pattern This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock pattern and update it if necessary This process is similar to changing your password from time to time 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt
331. sion leakage or other hazard Samsung s warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused by nonSamsung approved batteries and or chargers Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers Some websites and second hand dealers not associated with reputable manufacturers and carriers might be selling incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers Consumers should purchase manufacturer or carrier recommended products and accessories If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger Misuse or use of incompatible phones batteries and charging devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of fire explosion or leakage leading to serious injuries damages to your phone or other serious hazard Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only important for safety it benefits the environment Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly Health and Safety Information 325 Recycling programs for your mobile device batteries and accessories may not be available in your area We ve made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile device by working with respected take back companies in every state in the country Drop It O
332. sired on screen image to pan around it Move the device left or right to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large on screen image Mute pause Once enabled mute incoming calls and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on a surface This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture To activate Palm Motion 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Palm motion slider to the right to turn it on 3 Read the on screen notification and tap OK Note At least one feature must be activated before Palm motion can be activated 4 Inasingle motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position The following is a description some of the most commonly used gestures 294 Capture screen Once enabled you can capture any on screen information swiping across the screen In a single motion press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form left to right The image is then copied to the clipboard Palm Swipe to Screen Capture Mute pause Once enabled you can pause any on screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen with your hand Once you remove your hand from the screen the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the current video or unmuting the current sound To activate Smart Screen The Smart screen options allow you to customize your Screen settings to make the scr
333. sor used to detect Air View and Air Gesture motions Proximity and Light Sensor uses the ambient light level to make adjustments If the light path is blocked for example when holding the phone close to your ear the touch screen will turn off While talking on the phone the sensor detects talk activity and locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses In a bright light condition outdoors the sensors cause the device to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing n dim light conditions the device decreases the screen brightness to compensate 11 Receiver allows you to hear the other caller Back View The following illustration shows the external elements of your Device 1 Flash is used to take photos in low light conditions 2 SPen provides a stylus that assists you in performing different functions 3 External speaker allows you to hear ringers music and other sounds offered by your device 4 micro SIM Card Slot internal Installation location for SIM card 5 microSD Card Slot internal allows you use a microSD card to expand the memory of your device 6 Headset jack allows you to connect a hands free headset so you can listen to music 7 Camera lens is used to take photos 8 IR Transmitter used to emit infrared signals used for controlling external devices For more information refer to WatchON on page 216 Understanding Your Device 23 Side Views The following
334. sounds 1 260 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Sound Tap Dialing keypad tone to activate a tone when you use on screen keys A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status Tap Touch sounds to activate a tone when you touch the screen A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status Tap Screen lock sound to activate a tone when you use the Lock screen A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status Tap Haptic feedback to activate the a vibration when you press soft keys on certain screens A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates this feature is active 6 Tap Pen attach detach sound to activate a sound played when the pen is either removed or iserted into its associated slot Choose a sound and tap OK Samsung Keyboard These options are used when you use the on screen keypad 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Sound Tap Key tap sound to activate a tone when you use on screen keys A check mark displayed next to this features indicates active status Tap Key tap vibration to activate the a vibration when you press on screen keys A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates this feature is active Audio Output This sound feature configures the audio output 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Sound gt Audio output 2 Choose from either Stereo or Surround Adapt sound The Adapt
335. ssage to a Group 1 From the Groups tab tap an existing group and press I and then tap Send message or Touch and hold a group entry and select Send message Select the recipients of the new message indicated by a green check mark If an entry contains multiple phone numbers each must be selected individually Tap Done Type your message and tap BA Send Contacts 95 The Favorites Tab The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been designated as favorite contacts For more information refer to Logs Tab on page 69 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Tap Miel Favorites tab Favorites Adding a contact to your favorites list 1 From within the Favorites tab press and select Add to Favorites 2 Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts entries you wish to assign as favorites 3 Tap Done to complete the process 96 Section 6 Messages This section describes how to send or receive different types of messages It also explains the features and functionality associated with messaging Types of Messages Your phone provides the following message types Text Messages Multimedia Picture Video and Audio Messages Email and Gmail Messages Hangouts Messenger ChatON The Short Message Service SMS lets you send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provid
336. ssages to send and receive from other mobile phones m From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt I Messages For more information refer to Messages on page 97 178 Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation in Messenger Google sends an update to your device Note When this application is accessed Hangouts is displayed 1 Signon to your Google account 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Ej Google folder gt Messenger or From the Google application select Messenger 3 Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google or Tap Add account to create another account 4 When prompted follow the on screen procedures to configure the Sync contacts parameters 5 When prompted configure the photo backup parameters as desired and tap Done 6 Tap E from the upper left of the screen and select from an available list of features such as Home People Communities Hangouts etc To create a new message 1 Tap E from the upper left of the screen and select Hangouts 2 Seelect an entry contact and tap Message to start a new message 3 Inthe bottom Send a message field enter a message then tap gt Send Mobile HotSpot Provides access to the Tethering and Mobile HotSpot menu where you can use either the USB tethering or portable HotSpot functionality 1 From the Home screen tap EE
337. t SIM Card Overview Important Before removing or replacing the micro SIM card make sure the device is switched off To turn the phone off hold down the eme Key until the Device options pop up displays then tap Power off The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your telephone number PIN available optional services and many other features Important The micro SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by scratching or bending so be careful when handling inserting or removing the card Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small children Getting Started 9 Some features on your device such as Wi Fi Calling can be To remove the micro SIM card unlocked by using the new micro SIM card 1 Remove the battery cover To use this new micro SIM card call or contact T Mobile 2 customer service for more information This card contains the necessary information for identifying and authenticating the user to the IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem To install the SIM card 1 Carefully slide the micro SIM card into the SIM card Note If the card is not inserted correctly the device will not socket until it is secured into place detect it and no service will be available If this happens turn off the device remove the card and reinstall the card in the correct orientation Remove the battery page 12 3 Carefully place your fingernail into the end of the micro SIM slot and begin to pull the
338. t screen To delete a shortcut 1 From the Home screen touch and hold the desired shortcut This unlocks it from its location on the current screen Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab qup and release it Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts Note You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the exception of the Apps shortcut To remove a primary shortcut m From the Home screen touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to replace then drag it to an empty space on any available screen The primary shortcuts are now updated to show an empty slot To insert a new primary shortcut From the Home screen tap Apps 2 Locate your desired application then touch and hold the on screen icon to position it on a desired screen For more information refer to Managing Shortcuts on page 35 Locate the screen with the desired shortcut you want to add as the new primary shortcut Touch and hold the shortcut until it detaches from the Screen In a single motion touch and hold the new shortcut then drag it into the empty space within the row of primary shortcuts The new primary shortcut will now appear on both the Home and Extended screens Adding and Removing Widgets Widgets are self contained applications that can be placed on any screen Unlike shortcuts widgets appear as applications To add a Widget 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt Widgets tab Scroll across the Widget
339. t 145 e Create folder allows you to create an application folder where you can better organize and group desired apps View type allows you to customize the way the Apps menu listing is shown Uninstall disable apps allows you to uninstall or disable Selected applications User downloaded apps will be uninstalled but core applications can only be disabled Tap O to remove the selected app Show disabled applications allows you to re enable previously disabled applications for viewing in this menu Once you have selected the apps tap Done 3 Press WM to return to the Home screen Accessing Recently Used Apps 1 Press and hold MM from any screen to open the recently used applications window Note The larger the number of applications running on your phone the larger the energy drain on your battery 146 2 Tapan icon to open the selected application Tap B to go to the Task manager Active applications display those currently active applications running on your phone Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from the Play Store that are taking up memory space Tap Uninstall to remove them from your phone RAM which displays the amount of current RAM Random Access Memory currently being used and allow you to Clear Memory Clear defaults allows you to clear the current default applications Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space within
340. t Settings This setting allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus You can also set on screen keyboard options m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt EB Controls tab gt Language and input Language Settings To set the language that the menus display on the phone 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab gt Language and input gt Language 2 Select a language and region from the list Choose Input Method 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab gt Language and input Default Select an input method or Tap Set up input methods to alter modify the available input methods Samsung Keyboard Settings 1 From the main Settings page tap Controls tab gt Language and input Samsung keyboard or From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods drag across the icons and select te Settings to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen Set any of the following options Input languages sets the input language Tap a language from the available list The keyboard is updated to the selected language Changing Your Settings 283 Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode This must Key tap feedback provides feedback functions to be enabled be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings Touch and such as hold to access the advanced settings Sound enables audi
341. t of available videos displays in the Video list 2 Tap a video file to begin viewing Sharing Videos 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt o Video After a few seconds each on screen video begins to cycle through a preview of the first five seconds of the clip Press and then tap Share via Select either individual videos or tap Select all Done to complete the process or Cancel to quit Select a sharing option Choose from Add to Dropbox Bluetooth ChatON Email Evernote Create Note Gmail Google Messages Picasa S Note Scrapbook Wi Fi Direct or YouTube Additional Video Features 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt o Video Press and then tap an available option Sign in allows you to sign into your Samsung Hub account to help manage content Sort by allows you to sort current videos by Title Date Size or Type View as allows you to display the on scren video images as either a List Thumbnail or Folders Share via allows you to share a selected video with external sources Delete allows you to delete selected videos Edit allows you to edit a selected video file Auto play next allows you to play videos consecutively Once a video ends the next available video begins to play Information provides on screen information about the application Settings allows you to configure application functions such as Default storage Auto update apps a
342. t the type of service loading Notification Choose from Always Prompt or Never Notification settings Notifications allows you to see message notifications on your status bar Select ringtone allows you to set the ringtone for your message notifications Vibrate allows you to configure the vibration mode associated with message alerts Message alert repetition allows you to set the interval for new message alerts Choose from Once Every 2 minutes or Every 10 minutes Preview message when enabled allows you to view a brief preview of new message text on the Status bar Messages 107 Emergency message settings Emergency alerts allows you to configure emergency alert Settings You can enable disable those alert categories you wish to receive Choose from Imminent extreme alert Imminent severe alert and AMBER alerts Note The Presidential alert can not be disabled Emergency notification preview allows you to play a sample emergency alert tone Tap Stop to cancel the playback Spam message settings Spam settings when enabled allows you to configure available spam settings such as Add to spam numbers allows you to manually enter and assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source Add to spam phrases allows you to assign a specific text phrase as belonging to a spam message Ex Dear friend Block unknown senders when active automatically blocks incoming messages from unknown sources or
343. tacts Amy Smith has a regular email account that you maintain in Gmail but also has a Facebook account under her maiden and married name as well as a Video chat account when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her entries and view the information in one record Joining contact information makes sending messages easy You can select any account email address or information all from one screen versus searching multiple individual screens to locate the desired account information Next time you synchronize your device with your accounts any updates contacts make to email account names email addresses etc automatically update in your contacts list 1 From the Home screen tap n6 2 Tapa contact name the name you want to link to another entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen Important It is the first contact image that is displayed for both and the first contact s name that is used For example If Amy original entry is joined with Julie second entry Julie seems to disappear and only Amy remains Tap the Amy entry showing the Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name Amy image to view both or account information 5 Tapthe main linked contact to view the contact information you linked The contacts and information displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type of account information is contained in the entry 3 Press el
344. tant information about the current feature that could affect performance Warning Brings to your attention important information to prevent loss of data or functionality or even prevent damage to your phone Text Conventions This manual provides condensed information about how to use your phone To make this possible the following text conventions are used to represent often used steps 3 Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting successive options in longer or repetitive procedures Example From the Home screen press iei Menu gt Settings gt Connections tab gt Bluetooth Removing the Battery Cover The battery micro SIM card and SD card are installed under the battery cover Important Before removing or replacing the battery cover make sure the device is switched off To turn the device off hold down the eme key until the Device options pop up displays then tap Power off Caution Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively during installation or removal Doing so may damage the cover To remove the battery cover 1 Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch 1 2 Place your fingernail in the opening 2 and firmly pop the cover off the device similar to a soda can Release Latch Installing and Removing the SIM card This device uses a different type of SIM card called a micro SIM Other larger SIM cards will not function or fit within this slo
345. the right to turn it on BIST The device scans for available in range wireless networks and displays them under Wi Fi networks on the same screen Changing Your Settings 229 Deactivating Wi Fi 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings Connections tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the left to turn it off or Activate and Deactivate Wi Fi from the Notification bar Note Use of wireless data connections such as Wi Fi and Bluetooth can reduce battery life and use times Connecting to a Wi Fi Network 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt Wi Fi The network names and security settings Open network or Secured with WEP of detected Wi Fi networks display in the Wi Fi networks section 2 Tapthe network you wish to connect to Note When you select an open network you are automatically connected 230 3 Enter a wireless password if necessary 4 Tap Connect Wi Fi Status Indicators The following icons indicate the Wi Fi connection status lt gt Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and ie communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an qv available open wireless network Wi Fi settings Once set up for Wi Fi connectivity your device automatically uses Wi Fi when available for all your mobile services 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi 2 Press
346. the Clock application touch and hold an on screen alarm event 2 Tap Delete World Clock This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of world 1 From within the Clock application tap the World clock tab 2 Tap Add city then scroll and select the desired city or tap in the search field to locate a city Applications and Development 157 To assign DST settings 1 Locate a desired city from the World clock list 2 Touch and hold a city and select DST settings Select a DST setting Automatic Off or 1 hour If Daylight Savings Time is selected a sun symbol appears next to the World Clock city listing Stopwatch This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the stopwatch keep running 1 From within the Clock application tap Stopwatch tab Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter Tap Stop to stop the counter Tap Restart to restart the lap counter You can have multiple lap times 6 Tap Reset to reset the counter gu ge SP 158 Setting a Timer 1 From within the Clock application tap Timer tab 2 Tap the Hours Minutes or Seconds field and use the on screen keypad to enter the hour minute or seconds The timer plays an alarm at the end of the countdown 3 Tap Start to start the timer 4 Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and start over 5 Tap Restart to resume the timer counter Contacts The default storag
347. the System storage and external SD card Note For more information on closing recently opened apps see Shutting Down an Currently Active Application on page 147 Tap to go to Google Search For more information refer to Google on page 162 Tap zx to delete the record of all recently used applications Shutting Down an Currently Active Application m Press and hold S Home and then tap E End all or 1 Press and hold MM Home and then tap r3 Task manager 2 From the Active applications tab tap End to close selected applications or Tap End all to close all background running applications Application Folders There are several applications that are grouped into different folders The applications in this sections are described alphabetically The following folders contain the applications listed below Samsung This folder contains the following applications Action Memo Calculator Downloads Group Play Internet KNOX My Files PEN UP S Health S Translator S Voice Samsung Link Story Album Voice Recorder VPN Client and WatchON g Google This folder contains the following applications Gmail Google Google Settings Google Hangouts Messenger Play Books Play Games Play Magazine Play Movies amp TV Play Music Voice Search and Chrome Applications and Development 147 Galaxy Plus This folder contains the following applications Bloomberg Dropbox Evernote Flipboar
348. the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Uninstall Clear data Clear cache or Clear defaults Uninstalling third party applications You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed from the Play Store 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Application manager gt DOWNLOADED 2 Tapthe third party application and from the App info screen tap Uninstall Applications and Development 193 POLARIS Office 5 Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite This application provides a central place for managing your documents online or offline The application can also open Adobe PDF Portable Document Format files 1 3 194 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt Galaxy Plus folder gt m POLARIS Office 5 From the Registration screen enter your Email information if desired and tap Register to complete the process or Tap Skip to ignore this registration The main Polaris Office screen displays Follow the on screen instructions to use Polaris Office On its initial launch navigate the application to begin USe New creates a new office document Menu provides access to Settings and Help Recent documents provides a scrollable list of recently accessed documents Samples provides access to sample Word PowerPoint and Excel files File Browser allows you to search on your device and SD card for compatible documents Form type al
349. the current playlist songs Returns the user to the music category screen Assign the current song as a Favorite Streams the current music file to another device via Samsung Link Making a Song a Phone Ringtone 1 From within the Music application tap the Songs tab 2 Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the on screen context menu 3 Tap Setas Phone ringtone 4 Choose a starting point for the ringtone to start playing from Select either From the beginning or Auto recommendations you can allow the application to choose the best part to start from 5 Select Done Note Additional Set as options include Caller ringtone and Alarm tone Music Options The Music settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background sound effects and how the music menu displays m With the application displayed and playing a song press and select one of the following options Via Bluetooth scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth headset Play via Group Play allows you to share music with others via the Group Play application All users must be connected to the same Wi Fi For more information refer to Group Play on page 165 Add to playlist allows you to add the current music file to a selected playlist Set as allows you to set the current song as a Phone ringtone Caller ringtone or Alarm tone Additionally you can either choos
350. the square will turn red Self portrait allows you to set the front camera so you can take pictures of yourself Front Camera Dual Camera allows you to activate both the front and rear cameras simultaneously For more information refer to Taking Dual Camera Photos on page 127 Quick Settings activates the Quick Settings menu bar from where you can select several additional settings For more information refer to Quick Settings on page 126 Multimedia 125 Image viewer allows you to access the Image viewer and the various viewing options for a selected picture The last picture you took will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon Effects Downloads provides access to pre installed and downloaded effects Default effects include No effect Cartoon Faded color Fisheye Grayscale Moody Oil pastel Rugged Sepia Tint Turquoise Vignette Vintage and Download Camcorder button shoots a video when pressed Camera button takes a photo when pressed in Camera mode y Mode button allows you to select from different VC camera modes 126 W ll Storage location Connection Status indicates the La device is connected to an adapter and the current storage location for images Device or Memory card on the device Quick Settings Tap at the top of the display to quickly change Camera settings Not all of the following options are available in both Still camera and video camera m
351. tic feedback 3 Tap OK to assign the vibration levels Setup the Ringtones This option allows you to set the ringtone 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Sound Ringtones 2 Tap aringtone from the available list The ringtone briefly plays when selected 3 Tap Add to locate a compatible media file that can be used as a ringtone 4 Tap OK to assign a ringer Setup the Vibration This option allows you to set your device to vibrate and ring 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Sound gt Vibrations 2 Select a vibration pattern and tap OK or Tap Create to then use an on screen touch circle to create your own custom vibration pattern Tap Save to Store the new vibration pattern Default Notification Sound This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for notifications and alarms 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Sound 2 Tap Default notification sound 3 Select a ringtone and tap OK Setting up Vibration When Ringing This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming 1 From the main Settings page tap Device tab gt Sound 2 Tap the Vibrate when ringing field to activate the feature Changing Your Settings 259 Audible System Tone Settings These options are used when you use the dialing pad make a screen selection lock your screen or tap the screen Each time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone
352. tice and Cautions 337 Fixed Dialing Numbers 279 Flipboard 161 Folder Create 32 Font 269 Size 269 Style 269 Font Size Caption 220 Changing 272 Forgot Pattern 267 G Galaxy Gear 19 Gallery Folder Options 138 Opening 143 Picture In Picture 212 Games Volume 258 Gesture Settings 290 358 Gestures Overview 47 Getting Started 7 Battery 12 Battery Cover 8 Locking Unlocking the Device 17 microSD card 11 SIM Card 9 Switching Device On Off 16 Voicemail 17 Gmail 162 Opening 162 Personalize 285 Google Backing Up Settings 302 Settings 164 Signing into Your Account 162 Voice Typing 73 Google Books 187 Google Maps Enabling a location source 177 Opening a map 177 Google Music 189 Google Now 162 215 Adjust Settings 163 Google Settings 164 Google Talk see Hangouts 167 Google Voice Typing Configuring 286 Using 74 GPS amp AGPS 328 Group Joining 166 Group Play 165 Creating a Group 165 Joining a Group 166 Share Music 167 181 Share Pictures 130 Sharing Pictures 165 Spanning Screens 166 Groups Adding an Member to an Existing Group 94 Creating a new caller group 94 Deleting 95 Deleting a Caller Group 95 Editing a Caller Group 95 Removing an Entry 95 Settings 95 H Handrwriting Language Search 286 Handwriting 76 Haptic Feedback Turn On Off 308 Vibrate 260 Vibration Setting 258 HDR 125 Health and Safety Information 315 Hearing Aid Compatibility 282 Hearing Aids 273 Help In Device 168 H
353. tings gt Device tab gt Wallpaper 2 Select an available option to change its current wallpaper For more information refer to Managing Wallpapers on page 38 Font This function adjusts the font styles and size being displayed on the screen 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Device tab gt Font 2 Adjust an available on screen option to adjust either the font style and size Font style sets the fonts used on the LCD display Selections are Default font Choco cooky Cool jazz Rosemary Samsung Sans or Get fonts online Tap Get fonts online to download additional fonts Font size allows you to select which size of font is displayed Changing Your Settings 269 Notification Panel This feature allows you to set the brightness of your notification panel and also select the quick setting buttons that you want to display at the top of the notification panel page 33 1 From the Home screen press eil and then tap Settings gt Device tab gt Notification panel 2 Enable the Brightness adjustment field to activate the ability to adjust the screen brightness via the notification panel To customize the notification panel quick access buttons 1 Access the Notification Panel screen The set of buttons within the Notification panel area are those that are available within the Notifications panel They provide quick access to available features These can be customized by the us
354. tion Note Google instant upload may resize your images in order to reduce size Group Play This application lets you share documents photos or music in real time with other connected friends Note Group play is not the same as Screen mirroring which requires a connection to a Wi Fi capable Samsung TV or via the use of the AllShare Cast Hub For more information refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 143 Important To share a Group Play all users must be connected to the same Wi Fi access point 1 From the Home screen tap ui Apps gt Samsung folder gt 4 Group Play 2 Read the on screen Disclaimer information and tap Agree to continue 3 Follow the on screen tutorials Creating a group If you have media you want to share create a group for other users to join to and then share collaborate with what you are sharing The creator of the group is the leader and it the source of the shared file All other joined members can then interact with the file being shared 1 Connectto an active Wireless Access Point and confirm your other participants are also connected to this same Wi Fi 2 From within the Group Play application tap the Set group password field to enable the function which requires users to enter a password prior to connecting to your new group 3 Tap Create group If previously selected enter your group password and tap OK Mobile AP is enabled 4 Tap one of the media items listed
355. tion 6 Tap Lock time zone to lock event time based on your current user selected time zone Select a time zone from within the Select time zone field 7 Tap Show week number to display the week numbers along the side of the week entries 152 10 11 12 13 Tap Hide completed tasks to activate this option A check mark indicates selection Tap Weather to activate this option A check mark indicates selection Tap Set alerts and notifications to adjust the event notification method Choose from Alert Status bar notification and Off Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event notification Tap Vibration to assign a vibration notification to this event Tap Quick responses to edit your default quick responses for outbound emails These are default responses similar to those used by text templates Camera Use your rear 13 0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG format The Camcorder shoots 1080P High Definition video in an MP4 format Recording is UHD 30fps Smooth motion FHD 60fps and Slow motion HD 120fps Note A microSD card is no longer necessary before you take pictures or shoot video It is recommended that you confirm your default storage location for images and videos m From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt Ie Camera For more information refer to Using the Camera on page 123 ChatON Provides a global mobile communication service where y
356. tion use special phone cases while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised Unlike hands free kits these so called shields may interfere with proper operation of the phone The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate leading to an increase in RF absorption Children and Cell Phones The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell phones from RF exposure including children and teenagers The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and teenagers as well Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head and the cell phone Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all For example The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000 In this report a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects Their recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly precautionary it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various sources can be obtained from the following organizations updated 10 1 2010 FCC RF
357. tive and your phone is visible 2 From the Home screen tap Contacts 3 Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the on screen context menu 4 Tap Share via gt Bluetooth and select a paired external Bluetooth device Note The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for the pairing to be successful 5 ABluetooth share notification displays in your notifications list Tethering and Mobile HotSpot This section covers procedures for both the Mobile HotSpot and USB tethering functionality Mobile HotSpot This feature allows you to turn your device into a Wi Fi hotspot The feature works best when used in conjunction with 4G LTE data services although 3G service can also be used The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Important The Mobile HotSpot service cannot be active when device is connected to Wi Fi Please disconnect your Wi Fi connection prior to active this service Note You must have a tethering plan on your account in order to use the Mobile HotSpot You cannot use data on the device while using Mobile HotSpot Changing Your Settings 241 To activate the Mobile HotSpot service 1 From the Home screen tap X Apps gt Livy T Mobile folder gt I Mobile HotSpot or From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt
358. to conserve battery power Displays when the USB Tethering mode is active and communicating For more information refer to Tethering and Mobile HotSpot on page 241 Displays when Wi Fi is being used as a Mobile HotSpot feature is active and communicating For more information refer to Tethering and Mobile HotSpot on page 241 Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes Displays whenthe Wi Fi calling feature is active and you are using it with within your current active call Displays when there is an error in the use or 911 registration of the Wi Fi Calling feature Displays when you are currently in Emergency calling mode You must exit this mode to resume normal calling function 8 Displays in the notifications window when a new T Mobile account information is available Displaysinthe notifications window whenthere are too many on screen notification icons to display Tap to show more notifications Tap to select a text input method Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Music application Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Play Music application Displays when your device s GPS is on and communicating Displays when the external SD card internal microSD has been disconnected unmounted from the phone and
359. to improce security and service 312 3 Tap Via Wi Fi only to only update the security policy automatically once the device is connected to an active Wi Fi network Credential Storage This option allows certain applications to access secure certificates and other credentials Certificates and credentials can be installed to the SD card and password protected 1 From the main Settings page tap General tab gt Security 2 Tap Storage type to designate the backup stoage location for certificates 3 Tap Trusted credentials to display only trusted CA certificates A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure credentials 4 Tap Install from device storage to install encrypted certificates from the USB Storage location 5 Tap Clear credentials to clear the device SD card or phone memory of all certificate contents and reset the credentials password About Device This menu contains legal information system tutorial information and other phone information such as the model number firmware version baseband version kernel version and software build number To access phone information m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Moe General tab gt About device The following information displays Software update allows you to connect to the network and upload any new phone software directly to your device The device automatically updates with the latest available software when you a
360. to my t mobile com Click on Profile and edit the Edit customer information Enter your emergency location information and complete the online registration From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks Wi Fi Calling isplays on Changing Your Settings 253 6 10 254 Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use by the Wi Fi Calling feature Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range Cellular Network Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls Never use Cellular Network Use only Wi Fi for calls Do not use Cellular Network even if available Tap OK to save the setting From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks Tap Wi Fi Calling slider to toggle off the feature then tap it again to reactivate the feature and re register your device with the T Mobile Network Confirm Ge Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar Launching Wi Fi Calling Note Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar Confirm Ci Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar Use the phone Dialer Logs or Contacts list to make a call N Go to the dialer and make a call Make sure GS Wi Fi Calling in use appears during the call When
361. to use Location Services The Location services allows you to configure the device s location services Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position 1 From the Home screen press ell and then tap Settings gt Bal Connections tab gt Location services 2 Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark and activate the service Access to my location allows apps that have asked your permission to use your location information Tap the ON OFF slider to tum it on Use GPS satellites allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint your location Use wireless networks allows applications to use data from mobile networks and Wi Fi to help determine your location My places allows you to add location information for your Home Office and Car Enabling the GPS Satellites 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Location services 2 Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite Using Wireless Networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Use wireless networks option 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Location services 2 Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location Changing Your Setting
362. tory feedback when you tap an Auto replacement automatically completes or replaces the on screen key current wor with the most probable word match after tapping Vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an the space bar or entering a punctuation mark on screen key Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of Character preview provides an automatic preview of the the first word in each sentence standard English style current character selection within the text string This is helpful Auto spacing automatically inserts space between words when multiple characters are available within one key Auto punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence More settings provides access to additional access to more by tapping the space bar twice when using the on screen settings QWERTY keyboard Pen detection enables the device to automatically switch to Keyboard swipe allows you to combine the Samsung handwriting mode when the S Pen is detected keyboard with an additional input method choose from Help launches a brief on screen help tutorial covering the main None leaves text input as only via the on screen keyboard concepts related to the Samsung keyboard SwiftKey Flow like using Swipe allows you to enter text by Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their sliding your fingers across the on screen keyboard This feature original configuration is optimized for use with t
363. tos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message m From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt Ded Gallery For more information refer to The Gallery on page 143 Applications and Development 161 Gmail Google Mail Gmail is a Web based email service Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone Depending on your synchronization settings Gmail can automatically synchronize with your Gmail account Creating a New Google Account You should create a Google Account when you first use your device in order to fully utilize the functionality This account provides access to several device features such as Gmail Hangouts and the Google Play Store applications Before you are able to access Google applications you must enter your account information These applications sync between your device and your online Google account Signing into Your Google Account 1 Launch an application that requires a Google account such as Play Store or Gmail 2 Click Existing 3 Tap the Email and Password fields and enter your information 4 Tap Sign in Your device communicates with the Google servers to confirm your information 162 5 If prompted you can enable the option to stay up to date on news and offers then tap OK Opening Gmail 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt Google folder gt IV Gmail 2 Tap an ex
364. u can hear adequately Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing When using headphones turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment use noise cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise By blocking background environment noise noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than when using earbuds Limit the amount of time you listen As the volume increases less time is required before you hearing could be affected Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises such as rock concerts that might cause temporary hearing loss Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal Health and Safety Information 331 Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort If you experience ringing in your ears hear muffled speech or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device discontinue use and consult your doctor You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive Suite 300 Reston VA 201
365. u to capture selected areas of a S Note application Email Messages ChatON Add to screen based on a freehand area drawn on screen Dropbox Bluetooth Evernote Create Note Flipboard Gmail Google Hangouts PEN UP Picasa S Note or 1 Grasp the pen Wi Fi Direct 2 Inasingle motion press and hold the S Pen button then S Pen Using Scrapbooker quickly draw a freeform enclosed shape on the screen 1 Remove the S Pen from its slot to select the area you want to capture 2 Navigate to your target medium such as a YouTube EE SS Ss s 2 292929292 I LLL video document or image Note The shape you draw must be completed by ending over 8 Hover over the screen and press the S Pen button the same point at which you started This creates a closed shape 4 From the Air Command menu select E Scrapbooker 3 After a second confirm the newly captured image 5 Inasingle motion quickly draw a freeform enclosed appears on screen shape on the screen to select the area you want to capture into your Scrapbook Understanding Your Device 45 9 Select the Scapbook option The image is copied into your clipboard From th top drop down menu select the target scrapbook into which to place the current selection Enter a memo and tag that can be assigned attached to your selection Tap Save to save your new entry S Pen Using Screen Write 1 2 3 Remove the S Pen from its slot Hover over the screen and press the S
366. uch and slide in any direction to answer the call Touch and slide in any direction to reject the call Create new message Tap Create new message to create a new custom message Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer 60 Answering a call with Air Gesture 1 Verify the Air Gestures feature is on and Air call accept is active For more information refer to Using Motions and Gestures on page 47 2 At the incoming call screen wave your hand over the Screen to accept the incoming call e f active the Air call accept icon X9 appears at the top of the incoming call screen Managing Reject Calls This feature allows you to categorize both known and unknown callers as rejected contacts These Contacts are then added to your Rejection list which can be managed for individual entries from within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection screen 1 From the Home screen tap 3 2 Press i and then tap Call settings gt Call rejection Tap the Auto reject mode field to configure your automatic rejection settings Rejected calls are routed automatically to your voicemail Choose from Off disables the auto rejection feature All numbers enables the features for all known and unknown numbers including those contacts that are not assigned to the rejection list Auto reject numbers automatically rejects all entries assigned to the Reject list Blacklist Adding numbers fo the r
367. ude in the opt out e mail a your name and address b the date on which the device was purchased c the device model name or model number and d the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number as applicable if you have it the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found i on the device box ii on the device information screen which can be found under Settings iii on a label on the back of the device beneath the battery if the battery is removable and iv on the outside of the device if the battery is not removable Alternatively you may opt out by calling 1 888 987 4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the device and providing the same information These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or its preloaded Software and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of this license 17 ENTIRE AGREEMENT SEVERABILITY This EULA is the entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications proposals and representations with respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA If any provision of this EULA is held to be void invalid unenforceable or illegal the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect 090413
368. ue of a photo Effects allows you to add various effects to your photo Portrait allows you to apply various face correction effects such as Red eye fix Airbrush face Face brightness Out of focus or Spot healing Sticker allows you to place various pre created on screen stickers atop your current image Drawing allows you to add draw directly on your current picture by using either a brush pen or eraser Frame places a pre created border style atop your current image Press to access the following options Save as allows you to rename your current image and save it 0 your gallery Select image allows you to select a new image for editing Take picture allows you to activate the camera and take a new image for editing Share via allows you to share your saved photo via Add to Dropbox Bluetooth ChatON Email Evernote Create Note Flipboard Gmail Google Group Play Hangouts Messages PEN UP Picasa S Note Scrapbook SketchBook for Galaxy or Wi Fi Direct Set as assigns the currently saved image as either a Contact photo Home and lock screens Home screen or Lock screen The Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For photos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message Note If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the Gallery access Files and remove some
369. umber and tap amp Speed Dialing Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List you can set up to 99 speed dial entries 2 100 and then dial them easily whenever you want simply by touching the associated numeric key Note Speed dial location 1 must be reserved for Voicemail use Setting Up Speed Dial Entries Important Speed dial location 1 is reserved for Voicemail No other number can be assigned to this slot 1 From the Home screen tap LG e gt Keypad tab 2 Press l and then tap Speed dial setting The Speed dial setting screen displays a virtual list of locations with the numbers 2 through 100 3 Tapan unassigned number slot The Select contact screen displays 4 Tapa contact and select a number to assign it to the speed dial location The selected contact number image is displayed in the speed dial number box Keypad Call Functions and Contacts List 63 Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order 1 From the Home screen tap a3 Keypad tab 2 Press and then tap Speed dial setting Important The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number cannot be assigned to this slot 3 Press and then tap Change order 4 Tapthe current entry then tap the new target speed dial location Note Tapping 2 existing speed dial locations causes the entries to switch positions 5 Tap Done to store the change 6 Press SD to return to the previous screen 64 Removing a Speed Di
370. unctions with an external AllShareCast Hub to fully mirror what is currently displayed on your device to the external TV Important You must first connect both of your communicating devices to the same Wi Fi and be using an active registered Samsung account prior to using this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 230 For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 297 Applications and Development 203 7 Tap H to reveal the DEVICES amp STORAGE list scroll down the screen The DEVICES amp STORAGE list contains two separate streaming media options Registered devices allows you to stream share selected Important The Samsung account manages the access information username password to several applications such as Samsung Link 1 Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device account connected to the same Wireless Access Point 2 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt Registered storage allows you to receive and playback media Samsung folder gt Samsung Link stored externally server laptop etc reci on your iad by allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming 3 If prompted with an on screen notification about no Wi Fi detected tap Cancel to continue by using your network connection or Connect to continue 4 Tap Sign in 5 If prompted to log into your Samsung acco
371. und with the device without the pen inserted in its slot Pointer allows you to activate the ability to show the pointer when you hover the S Pen over the screen Direct pen input displays the handwriting pad within the text input area when the S Pen is detected Pen detachment options allows you activate a selected action when the device detects the S Pen is detached Choose from None Action Memo or Air command Pen attach detach sound allows you to select a sound to be played whenever the pen is attached or detached Changing Your Settings 289 One Handed Operation This feature can be used to customize screen display and input for use with one hand 1 290 From the Home screen press el and then tap Settings gt Controls tab gt One handed operation Select or activate any of the following Use for all screens configures selected options for all available screens This feature adjusts the scale and position of all screens by swiping the edge of the current screen Keypad and in call buttons activate the feature to adjust the position of the dialing keyboard and in call buttons for one handed operation Samsung keyboard activate the feature to adjust the position of the Samsung keyboard for one handed operation Calculator activate the feature to adjust the position of the Samsung calculator for one handed operation Unlock pattern activate to adjust the scale of the unlock patter
372. under the Share and play content heading 5 Tapto select the items you want to share indicated by a checkmark then tap Done or OK Applications and Development 165 6 Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their devices see below and they can view your media using you as a Mobile AP Joining a group A joiner is the participant of an already created group You can only view and interact with media shared by the leader of an existing group 1 Connectto an active Wireless Access Point and confirm your connection is this same Wi Fi as the group leader 2 From within the Group Play application tap Join group Your device then scans for available groups for you to join 3 Select a group to join Once connected you can then select the shared content and interact with your group s shared media 4 Press and select Help for additional information 166 Using Group Play to Share Videos via Split Screens 1 Connectto an active Wireless Access Point and confirm your connection is this same Wi Fi as the group leader 2 From within the Group Play application tap Create group If previously selected enter your group password and tap OK 3 Before continuing have all users launch their respective Group Play application and connect to your new group Important Once users begin to connect you are notified by an on screen pop up and the connected user indicator 19 displays the new number of connected users 4 On y
373. unt tap Sign in and follow the on screen instructions content Configuring Samsung Link Settings The Samsung Link application must first be configured prior to its initial use You must setup parameters such as connected Wi Fi Items to share source server address and external device acceptance rights Note If the main screen still shows a Sign in box close the Ms Home screen tap i Apps gt application and restart it Samsung folder gt o Samsung Link 2 Press i and then tap Settings and configure the 6 Follow the on screen prompts following settings as desired 204 Registered storage allows you to add a Web storage location Without a storage service location added you will not be able 0 use Samsung Link Save to allows you to save your media to your internal phone memory or to an SD card Auto upload allows you to enable automatic upload of images Tom your device to those storage locations specified within the Web storage list Move the slider to the on position to activate he feature Video optimization allows you to setup the video quality for streamed video content Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature Password lock allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated Samsung account password Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature My account displays Samsung account information About
374. ure requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 297 1 Confirm you are currently signed into your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap EHI Apps gt e Samsung Apps 3 If prompted read the Disclaimer Terms and conditions and Privacy policy and tap Accept 4 Follow the on screen instructions Applications and Development 199 Samsung Hub Samsung Hub makes it easy to find sample and purchase movies TV shows books games and music in one user friendly location With hundreds of titles available entertaining your family on the go has never been easier You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from any location Samsung Hub is your gateway to mobile entertainment You must have an active Samsung Account to purchase and rent content via Samsung Hub Note Samsung Hub usage is based on service availability Important You must be using an active Wi Fi AG LTE connection to preview and download a media file The internal memory acts as a storage location for your downloaded rental or purchase Important The Samsung account manages the access information username password to several applications such as Samsung Link Chat On and Samsung Hub 200 Creating a New Samsung Hub Account Before you can rent or buy media you must first create an account Enter the required information 1
375. using a paired Bluetooth headset with built in microphone verify the Call audio option is enabled within the entry s Bluetooth Settings page 240 Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the device and your phone but retains the knowledge of the pairing At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device there is no need to setup the connection information again 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap the previously paired device from the bottom of the page 3 Tap OK to confirm disconnection Note Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device Deleting a device from your list removes its connection record and upon reconnection would require that you re enter all the previous pairing information 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap t3 Settings gt Unpair to delete the paired device Sending Contacts via Bluetooth Depending on your paired devices settings and capabilities you may be able to send pictures Contact information or other items using a Bluetooth connection Note Prior to using this feature Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your phone and the external device and the recipient s device must be visible 1 Verify your Bluetooth is ac
376. using the commands Answer and Reject Alarm allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the commands Stop and Snooze Camera allows you to take pictures using the voice commands Smile Cheese Capture or Shoot Music allows you to control your Music player using the voice commands Next Previous Pause Play Volume Up and Volume Down Note If you set the alert type for calls or alarms to vibration voice control will not be available Hands free Mode When enabled alarm and information will be read aloud 1 From the Home screen press ell and then tap Settings gt FES Tap to turn the mode ON Enable any of the following options Incoming call read out callers information when receiving incoming calls Air call accept wave your hand over the screen to accept incoming calls Message read out senders information when receiving incoming calls Alarm read out alarm information when alarms sound Schedule read out scheduled alarm information when alarms sound When this option is enabled displays in the Status Bar Controls tab gt Hands free mode S Pen Settings This menu allows you to customize settings for the S Pen 1 2 From the main Settings page tap S Pen The following options are available e Turn off pen detection allows you to deactivate pen detection S Pen keeper allows to enable a a sound alert and on screen Notification when you walk aro
377. utomatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts Note Before using this application you must first have an active Gmail account available and be currently logged in 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt Google folder gt Q Hangouts Note If you are not already logged into Google refer to the instructions for signing in on page 162 Applications and Development 167 2 When prompted read the on screen information and Internet confirm your phone number is correct before using the Open the browser to start surfing the Web The browser is application Tap Confirm fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone Your device is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the mobile Web This section explains how to navigate the browser and use the basic features Accessing the Internet To access the Browser m From the Home screen tap ES Apps gt Note Confirming your phone number does not make it publicly available Help Provides access to built in Help information 1 Fromthe Home screen tap EE Apps gt o Help 2 Select an on screen topics for more information New features provides help on all of the new features and Samsung folder gt Internet applications such as Air command Scrapbook S Finder Navigating with the Browser S Note Easy chart
378. ware tech there s a lost and stolen phone locator service an application privacy adviser and a backup service 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt d T Mobile folder gt J Lookout Security 2 Read the on screen information tap Activate Lookout gt Next 3 Read the on screen descriptions and activate those desired features Tap Next to progress to the next screen 4 Tap Done to complete the setup 5 Create a Lookout account by entering an email address and account password 6 Re enter the password and tap Start Lookout 176 Maps Google Maps allow you to track your current location view real time traffic issues and view detailed destination directions There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of interest or a specific address You can view locations on a vector or aerial map or you can view locations at the street level Important Before using Google Maps you must have an active data 3G 4G LTE or Wi Fi connection The Maps application does not cover every country or city m From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt Su Maps Important For best results it is recommended that you enable all of your location services For more information refer to Location Services on page 247 Enabling a Location source Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable a location source To enable the location source you must enable the wire
379. wer source via the USB Travel Adapter Note The status LED begins to blink solid red to indicate it has begun the start up process LED Color Patterns Description Red Solid Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is booting or processing Red Blinking Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is in standby mode ready for connection 144 Blue Solid Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is ready to be connected with a new device 2 Connect your TV to the AllShare Cast Hub via an HDMI cable A to A cable 3 Change the source input on your TV to match the input port used by the incoming HDMI cable Note The television screen should now display an on screen tutorial showing you how to configure your device s AllShare Cast Hub and device settings To activate Screen Mirroring on your device 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt Screen Mirroring 2 If not already on tap the Screen Mirroring and then move the slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status Section 8 Applications and Development This section contains a description of each application that is available in the Applications Menu its function and how to navigate through that particular application If the application is already described in another section of this user manual then a cross reference to that particular section is provided Note This manual only addresses applicat
380. wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven hair dryer iron or radiator Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire The phone or the battery may explode when overheated Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery Do not let leaking battery fluid come in contact with your eyes skin or clothing For safe disposal options contact your nearest Samsung authorized Service center Avoid dropping the cell phone Dropping the phone or the battery especially on a hard surface can potentially cause damage to the phone and battery If you suspect damage to the phone or battery take it to a service center for inspection Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects Accidental short circuiting can occur when a metallic object coin key jewelry clip or pen causes a direct connection between the and terminals of the battery metal strips on the battery for example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag Short circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the object causing the short circuiting Important Use only Samsung approved batteries and recharge your battery only with Samsung approved chargers which are specifically designed for your phone WARNING Use of a non Samsung approved battery or charger may present a risk of fire explo
381. will soon shutdown Charge 4 1 Displays when connected to the EDGE network Displays when your phone is communicating with the EDGE network Displays when connected to the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when your phone is communicating with the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when connected to the HSPA network Displays when your phone is communicating with the HSPA network t X MEKKA e Displays when your phone is communicating with the 4G LTE network Displays when the device has detected an active USB connection and is in a USB Debugging mode Displays when the device has detected an active USB 3 0 connection and has been enabled for USB 3 0 communication Displays when there is a new text message Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to be delivered Displays when an incoming text message content has failed to be downloaded Displays when there is a new voicemail message Displays when there is a new visual voicemail message Displays in the notifications window when there is a new Email message A 4 4 9 9 Q bl Displays in the notifications window when there is anew Gmail message Displays when a new Google notification has been received Displays when the user is prompted to set up a new Dropbox account Displays when the user is prompted with a Lookout Security notification Displays when the
382. with basic image tuning like brightness contrast and color it also provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture 1 Note To select the picture area touch and hold the current picture From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt KK Gallery Select a folder location and tap a file to open it With the image displayed press and then tap Edit Edit allows you to edit the current image Launches the Photo Editor application xo 3 i Select an image area by touching and holding the image and then selecting an available option Selection mode provides several on screen selection options such as Select area Inverse selection Selection size and Selection mode Magnetic Lasso Brush Round or Square Select all select the entire area of the current image e Clipboard copies the currently selected are to your device s Clipboard Use the following editor controls to edit your picture Previous lets you undo the current operation Next lets you redo the previous operation Cancel Delete exits the current photo editing session Save stores the currently edited photo Rotate allows you to rotate a photo in all 4 directions You can also mirror image a photo Multimedia 141 g Ei Pe 7 EB 142 Crop allows you to crop cut out an area of a photo Color allows you to Auto adjust color Brightness Contrast Saturation Adjust RGB Temperature Exposure and H
383. y or indirectly for any damage or loss including but not limited to any damage to the mobile device or loss of data caused or alleged to be caused by or in connection with use of or reliance on any such third party content products or services available on or through any such application You acknowledge and agree that the use of any third party application is governed by such third party application provider s Terms of Use License Agreement Privacy Policy or other such agreement and that any information or personal data you provide whether knowingly or unknowingly to such third party application provider will be subject to such third party application provider s privacy policy if such a policy exists SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER 12 SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS Certain Samsung applications and services may be included with or downloaded to this mobile device Many of them require Samsung Services 348 membership registration Samsung Account and your rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung Account terms and conditions and privacy policies There are non Samsung Account a
384. y query the GPS satellites for your current location each query drains your battery Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging your device Repeating this process of a complete discharge and recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery Use the Power Saving feature to deactivate some hardware and interface functions Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions have been consuming your battery resources Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications Getting Started 15 Use the Task Manager feature to end shutdown background applications that are still running These minimized applications can over time cause your device to slow down Animated wallpapers use processing power memory and more power Change your Live Wallpaper to a non animated Wallpaper gallery or Gallery image Switching the Device On or Off Once the device has been configured you will not be prompted with setup screens again To turn the device on m Press and hold eme Power End until the device switches on Note The display language is preset to English at the factory To change the language use the Language menu For more information refer to Language and Input Settings on page 283 16 To turn the device off 1 Press and hold eme Power End until the Device options screen appears 2 Tap Power off e Initial Device Configuration
385. ylus Using excessive force or a metallic object your battery plug the flat end of the cable into the when pressing on the touch screen may damage smaller port in the device s Charger Accessory jack the tempered glass surface and void the warranty For more information refer to Standard Limited Warranty on page 339 14 Low Battery Indicator When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time remain 15 charge a warning tone sounds and the Battery low message repeats at regular intervals on the display In this condition your device conserves its remaining battery power by dimming the backlight When the battery level becomes too low the device automatically turns off The on screen battery charge is represented by default as a colored battery icon You can also choose to display a percentage value Having a percentage value on screen can provide a better idea of the remaining charge on the battery m Press WEM gt and then tap Settings gt Device tab Display Show battery percentage Extending Your Battery Life Active applications light levels Bluetooth usage and GPS functionality all act to drain your battery The following is a list of helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power Reduce your backlight on time Turn Bluetooth off when not in use Turn Wi Fi off when not in use Deactivate the GPS when not needed Most applications using this function will periodicall
386. yourself on this account The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from other email accounts accessed by your device 7 Tap Done to store the new account Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab You can also view Personal information for this account Receipts if you setup the account to return receipts Travel information and more if available Opening an Email 1 From the Home screen tap EE 2 Email Account name Inbox Loading messages Access available accounts and folders 2 Tap account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page e Selecting Combined view allows you to view all the emails for your current accounts managed by the application to be listed ona single screen 3 Select an email account and tap an email message Messages 113 Refreshing Email messages 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap EA gt Email Select an email account f you are already in an email account tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page Select an available email account Tap Refresh Composing Email 1 2 114 Tap the email text field and compose your email message To add an attachment such as image video audio etc tap Attach from the top of the screen and make a category selection Tap the file you wish to attach Tap to delete the attache

T-Mobile SM-N900T Samsung Galaxy Note 3 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents